Technical Guide - Headworks Design - JICA

Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA)
Oromia Irrigation Development Authority (OIDA)
Technical Guideline for

Design of Headworks
May, 2014
The Project for Capacity Building in Irrigation Development (CBID)

Foreword
Oromia Irrigation Development Authority (OIDA) is established on June,

2013, as a responsible body for all irrigation development activities in the
Region, according to Oromia National Regional Government proclamation
No. 180/2005. The major purposes of the establishment are to accelerate
irrigation development in the Region, utilize limited resources efficiently,
coordinate all irrigation development activities under one institution with
more efficiency and effectiveness.
To improve irrigation development activities in the Region, the previous

Oromia Water Mineral and Energy Bureau entered into an agreement with
Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA) for “The Project for Capacity
Building in Irrigation Development (CBID)” since June, 2009 until May,
2014. CBID put much effort to capacitate Irrigation experts in Oromia
Region through several activities and finally made fruitful results for
irrigation development. Accordingly, irrigation projects are constructed and
rehabilitated based on that several Guidelines & Manuals and texts
produced which can result in a radical change when implemented properly.
Herewith this massage, I emphasize that from Now on, OIDA to make efforts
to utilize all outputs of the project for all irrigation activities as a minimum
standard, especially for the enhancement of irrigation technical capacity.
I believe that all OIDA irrigation experts work very hard with their respective
disciplines using CBID outputs to improve the life standard of all people. In
addition, I encourage that all other Ethiopian regions to benefit from the
outputs.
Finally, I would like to thank the Japanese Government, JICA Ethiopia

Office, and all Japanese and Ethiopian experts who made great effort to
produce these outputs.
Feyisa Asefa Adugna

General Manager
Addis Ababa, Ethiopia
Oromia Irrigation Development
May, 2014
Authority
Introductory Remarks
“Growth and Transformation Plan” (GTP) from 2011 to 2015 intensifies use of
the country’s water and other natural resources to promote multiple cropping,
better adaptation to climate variability and ensure food security. Expansion of
small scale irrigation schemes is given a priority, while attention is also given
to medium and large scale irrigation.
In Oromia Region, it is estimated that there exists more than 1.7 million ha of
land suitable for irrigation development. However, only 800,000 ha is under
irrigation through Traditional and Modern irrigation technology. To accelerate
speed of Irrigation Development, the Oromia National Regional State requested
Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA) for support on capacity
building of Irrigation Experts under Irrigation Sector.
In response to the requests, JICA had conducted "Study on Meki Irrigation and
Rural Development" (from September 2000 to January 2002) and Project for
Irrigation Farming Improvement (IFI project) (from September 2005 to August
2008). After implementation of them there are needs to improve situation on
irrigation sector in Oromia Region.
JICA and the Government of Ethiopia agreed to implement a new project,
named “The project for Capacity Building in Irrigation Development” (CBID).
The period of CBID is five years since June, 2009 to May, 2014 and main
purpose is to enhance capacity of Irrigation Experts in Oromia Region focusing
on the following three areas, 1) Water resources planning, 2)
Study/Design/Construction management, 3) Scheme management through
Training, On the Job Training at site level, Workshops, Field Visit and so on
and to produce standard guidelines and manuals for Irrigaiton Development.
These guidelines and manuals (Total: fourteen (14) guidelines and manuals)
are one of the most important outputs of CBID. They are produced as
standards of Irrigation Development in Oromia Region through collecting
different experiences and implementation of activities by CBID together with
Oromia Irrigation Experts and Japanese Experts.
These guidelines and manuals are very useful to improve the Capacity of OIDA
Experts to work more effectively and efficiently and also can accelerate
Irrigation Development specially in Oromia Region and generally in the country.
Finally, I strongly demand all Irrigaiton Experts in the region to follow the
guidelines and manuals for all steps of Irrigation Development for sustainable
development of irrigation.
Adugna Jabessa Shuba

D/General Manager & Head, Study,
Addis Ababa, Ethiopia Design, Contract Administration &
May, 2014 Construction Supervision
Oromia Irrigation Development
Authority
Table of Contents
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................. 1

1.1 Introduction ................................................................................ 1
1.2 Definitions .................................................................................. 1
1.3 Aim of the Guideline ................................................................... 1
1.4 Scope of the Guideline ................................................................ 2
1.5 Components of Headworks .......................................................... 3
1.6 Basic Considerations of Headworks ............................................. 7
2. BASIC DESIGN INPUT DATA ............................................................ 9

2.1 Data for River Conditions ............................................................ 9
2.1.1 River Flow Regime ................................................................ 9
(1) Discharge Condition ......................................................... 10
(2) Water Level and Discharge ............................................... 11
(3) Sediment Load (if data are available) ................................. 15
2.1.2 Condition of Riverbed ........................................................... 17
(1) Condition of thalweg ......................................................... 17
(2) Riverbed slope .................................................................. 18
(3) Riverbed Materials ............................................................ 18
2.2 Studies on the Influence of Flood Control and Water Use ............ 19
2.2.1 Flood Control Plans.............................................................. 19
2.2.2 Situation of Upstream and Downstream Drainage ................ 19
2.2.3 Dikes, Bridges and Other Structures .................................... 20
2.2.4 Present Condition of River Water Utilization ......................... 20
2.3 Geotechnical and Geological Investigations ................................. 21
2.3.1 Drilling ................................................................................ 21
2.3.2 Test Pitting .......................................................................... 22
2.3.3 Bearing Capacity Tests ........................................................ 23
(1) Standard Penetration Test (SPT) ....................................... 23
i
(2) Loading Test ..................................................................... 26
2.3.4 Investigation on Riverbed Deposit ........................................ 26
2.3.5 Groundwater Investigation .................................................. 26
2.4 Assessment & Planning for Construction Works .......................... 27
2.4.1 Meteorology, Surface Water, Groundwater
and Riverbed Conditions ................... 27
2.4.2 Construction Equipment and Materials ............................... 28
2.4.3 Transportation of Equipment and Materials ......................... 28
2.4.4 Power Source for Construction ............................................ 28
2.4.5 Availability of Enough Labor for Construction ...................... 29
2.5 Topographical Survey .................................................................. 29
2.5.1 Topographic Survey ............................................................. 29
2.5.2 Longitudinal and Cross-Section Survey ............................... 30
2.5.3 Surveys for Other Temporary Works and Compensations..... 30
2.5.4 Collection of Topographic and Other Related Maps .............. 31
2.6 Data for Temporary Works .......................................................... 31
2.6.1 Annual Maximum Daily Rainfall and
Annual Maximum Hourly Rainfall ................ 31
2.6.2 Annual Daily Rainfall .......................................................... 32
2.6.3 Environmental Impact Assessment .................................... 32
3. DESIGN OF HEADWORKS ............................................................... 33

3.1 Basic Design ............................................................................... 33
3.1.1 Design Conditions ............................................................... 33
(1) Design water intake discharge .......................................... 33
(2) Design intake water level .................................................. 35
(3) Design flood discharge ...................................................... 36
(4) Design flood level .............................................................. 38
(5) Study of riverbed evolution ............................................... 39
ii
3.1.2 Position of Headworks ......................................................... 46
(1) Points of selecting Headworks position ............................. 46
(2) Process of selecting Headworks position ........................... 47
3.1.3 Method, Location and Type of Water Intake ......................... 48
(1) Method of water intake ..................................................... 48
(2) Location of intake ............................................................. 49
(3) Type of weir and direction of weir axis .............................. 50
3.1.4 Design Dimensions .............................................................. 54
(1) Design water intake level .................................................. 54
(2) Elevation of crest height of weir ........................................ 55
(3) Ensuring creep length ...................................................... 56
(4) Study of possible effect on the river control of upstream ... 61
3.2 Detail Design ............................................................................. 65
3.2.1 Movable Weir ....................................................................... 65
(1) Sill elevation of movable weir ............................................ 65
(2) Spillway by movable weir .................................................. 66
(3) Scouring sluice ................................................................. 68
(4) Pier .................................................................................. 81
3.2.2 Fixed Weir ........................................................................... 91
(1) Section shape ................................................................... 91
(2) Type of fixed weir .............................................................. 92
(3) External forces ................................................................. 92
(4) Determination of section (Stability analysis)...................... 97
(5) Correction of trapezoidal section ....................................... 98
(6) Apron ............................................................................... 100
3.2.3 Riprap ............................................................................... 101
(1) Basic concept for engineering of riprap work ..................... 101
(2) Conditions required for riprap .......................................... 102
(3) The shape of riprap .......................................................... 102
(4) The length of riprap of upstream side ............................... 103
iii
(5) The length of riprap A of downstream side ........................ 103
(6) Riprap B of downstream side ............................................ 107
(7) Use of Bligh's formula (Reference) ..................................... 107
(8) Structural engineering of riprap........................................ 108
3.2.4 Foundation Work ................................................................ 110
(1) Functions of foundation work ........................................... 110
(2) Types of foundation work ................................................. 110
3.2.5 Upstream and Downstream Cut-off Walls ........................... 119
(1) Upstream cut-off wall ....................................................... 119
(2) Downstream cut-off wall ................................................... 122
3.2.6 Inlet .................................................................................... 123
(1) Function of Inlet ............................................................... 123
(2) Location of inlet ................................................................ 124
(3) Features of Inlet Design .................................................... 124
(4) Flow Discharge at Inlet ..................................................... 126
(5) Water Level Calculation for Inlet ....................................... 128
3.2.7 Gate .................................................................................... 141
(1) Selection of type of gate .................................................... 141
(2) Lifting Height.................................................................... 149
(3) Material ............................................................................ 149
(4) Dimension of gate for Slide gate and Stop-log ................... 150
3.2.8 Related Structures .............................................................. 151
(1) Settling Basin ................................................................... 151
(2) Protection of bank and major bed ..................................... 165
3.2.9 Control Facilities ................................................................. 168
(1) Operation equipment ........................................................ 168
(2) Power receiving and distributing facilities ......................... 168
(3) Operation and maintenance bridge ................................... 168
(4) Other operation facilities .................................................. 170
(5) Operation ......................................................................... 170
iv
4. DATA SHEET, CHECK LIST AND OTHERS ....................................... 175
4.1 Data Sheet .................................................................................. 175
4.2 Check List................................................................................... 178
4.3 Coefficients of Roughness............................................................ 184
5. EXAMPLE OF DESIGN FOR HEADWORKS ....................................... 187

5.1 Basic Design Input Data ............................................................. 187
5.1.1 Discharge through Float Measurement Method .................... 187
5.1.2 Riverbed Slope..................................................................... 189
5.2 Basic Design ............................................................................... 191
5.2.1 Design Water Intake Discharge ............................................ 191
(1) In case of getting discharge data in or near river basin
of project site ................................................................... 191
(2) In case of getting discharge data by actual measurement .. 192
5.2.2 Design Intake Water Level ................................................... 193
(1) Water level of the field at the highest elevation of
the irrigation area ............................................................ 193
(2) Water level at the starting point of the main canal ............ 193
(3) The hydraulic loss between the intake and
the starting point of the main canal ................................. 193
(4) Other structural losses at the intake
(hydraulic loss of entrance) .............................................. 194
(5) Calculation result of design water intake level .................. 196
5.2.3 Design Flood Discharge ....................................................... 197
(1) In case of getting past flood discharge data in or
near river basin of project site .......................................... 197
(2) In case of using the maximum flood in the past based
on flood mark or discharge capacity of the river
by slope area method ....................................................... 198
5.2.4 Design Flood Level ............................................................... 203
v
5.2.5 Elevation of Crest Height and Length of Weir ....................... 203
5.2.6 Possible Effect on the River Control of Upstream.................. 203
(1) Water depth of the river where the place of headworks
before construction as design flood discharge
(Tail water depth) ............................................................. 203
(2) Water depth on the crest as design flood discharge ........... 203
5.3 Detail Design .............................................................................. 206
5.3.1 Fixed Weir ........................................................................... 206
(1) Section shape ................................................................... 206
(2) Determination of section (Stability analysis)...................... 206
(3) Apron ............................................................................... 215
5.3.2 Riprap ................................................................................. 219
(1) Calculation of water depth at the weir toe
as design flood discharge ................................................. 219
(2) Calculation of water depth at the beginning point of
hydraulic jump ................................................................ 221
(3) Comparison with h1a and h1b ............................................ 221
(4) Calculation of supercritical flow length ............................. 221
(5) The length of hydraulic jump ............................................ 221
(6) Necessary Length of riprap A ............................................ 221
(7) Length of riprap B ............................................................ 221
(8) Length of upstream riprap ................................................ 221
5.3.3 Foundation Work ................................................................ 222
5.3.4 Upstream and Downstream Cut-off Walls ............................ 222
5.3.5 Inlet .................................................................................... 222
5.3.6 Gate .................................................................................... 222
5.3.7 Settling Basin ...................................................................... 223
(1) Width and depth of sedimentation ditch ........................... 223
(2) Length of sedimentation ditch .......................................... 224
5.3.8 Protection of Bank and Major Bed ....................................... 224
vi
5.3.9 Scouring Sluice ................................................................... 224
(1) Diameter of riverbed materials .......................................... 225
(2) Design of scouring sluice intake ....................................... 225
(3) Engineering of upstream portion of scouring sluice ........... 225
(4) Cannel width of scouring sluice ........................................ 226
(5) Design of upstream slope of cannel ................................... 227
(6) Design of downstream cannel ........................................... 231
5.4 How to use “Goal seek” ............................................................... 232
References ........................................................................................... 234

List of Authors/Experts/Editors/Coordinators ..................................... 235
vii
Technical Guideline for Design of Headworks
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 Introduction
Irrigation development, irrespective of scale i.e. small, medium or
large, needs detail study and design. The study and design needs to
be conductuted rigorously with minimum standard quality. Unless it
results loss of money, wrong construction that inturn can result
negative environmental impact (water loss, salinity, gully,
conflict,etc.) and in general unsustainable development.
The study and design phase plays decisive role in irrigation
development. To enhance the quality of the study and design of
irrigation projects, it is necessasry to attain minimum quality
standard. For this reasson, it become necessary to prepare standard
terms of refrence, guidelines and manuals.
1.2 Definitions
In this guideline the following words and phrases are defined as
follows:
Headworks is a structure constructed across the river to effect local

storage and rise water level locally to divert part or all the supply in
to a channel. The height, quantity and period for which the supply is
stored make it different from dam. In this guideline, headworks is
defined as the facilities which divert water from a river (lake and
marsh areas, excluding reservoir) into a canal for irrigation use.
[Reference]
In the Multilingual Technical Dictionary of Irrigation and Drainage
issued by the International Commission on Irrigation and Drainage
(ICID), headworks is defined as "A collective term for all works
(weirs- or diversion dams, head regulators, upstream and
downstream river training works and their related structures)
required at intakes of main or principal canals to divert and control
river flows and to regulate water supplies into the main canal (s). "
1 . 3 A i m o f t h e Gu i d e l i n e
The aim of this guideline is to show the basic and important way of
design concepts and approaches of headworks for small and medium
1
Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA) & Oromia Irrigation Development Authority (OIDA)
scale irrigation. Irrigation engineers are expected to design

technically efficient, socially acceptable, economically viable and
environmentale friendly headworks through this guideline for
implementation.
The guideline assists the engineer to follow a specific design
procedure country wise to save time and materials.
1 . 4 S c o p e o f t h e Gu i d e l i n e
This guideline discusses the general procedures to be considered in
the design and construction of small and medium scale irrigation
diversion headworks. In Ethiopian, irrigation schemes are classified
in to three types based on the area. Small scale irrigation scheme is
less than 200ha,medium scale irrigation scheme is 200-3,000 ha
and large scale irrigation scheme is greater than 3000ha (In Oromia
0-2.5 ha micro irrigation, 2.5-200ha small and the rest has the same
classification with country level).
Some of the concepts in this guideline need specific data. Material

and equipment that are difficult to get at present situation of the
country requires time, qualified and experienced human resource for
accomplishement. In such cases, supplementary description is given
in box on what to do at least in current condtion, how to estimate
and design with available data without significant impact on the
quality of project.
The guideline takes into account all internal and external forces
acting on a weir, how they affect weir and make sure the structure
functions normal throughout its life time the purpose intended to
serve by providing appropriate dimension to all elements.
Technically, the guideline deals with all components of headworks

including intake facilities, diversion weir for maintaining water level
at the intake (except weirs with storage function), their related
structures and operation and maintenance (O & M) facilities. The
manual is also applicable for simple intakes without detail weir
body.
2
Fig.1.1 Layout of headworks
1.5 Components of Headworks

Components of headworks are shown in Fig. 1.2. Standard figures of
headworks plans and cross-sections used in the figure are shown in
Fig. 1.3 and Fig. 1.4.
Fig.1.2 Components of headworks
3
Devide wall
Wi n g w a l l (Guide wall)
Scouring River
Canal Settling sluice gate Protection
basin (Gabion)
Inlet/
Intake
Apron Hirna River

(D/S)
River Flow
Riprap(D/S)
Riprap (U/S)
Weir
Wi n g w a l l Apron (U/S)
Fig.1.3 General Plan of headworks
Inlet /
Scouring Intake
Settling sluice gate
basin
Apron
Devide wall (U/S)
(Guide wall)
Riprap
Wi n g (U/S)
wall Riprap (D/S)
Apron
(D/S)
We i r
Fig.1.4 (a) Standardized layout of headworks
4
Cross section
Wi n g Intake
wall Scouring gate
sluice gate
We i r
Wi n g
wall
Settling
basin Devide wall
(Guide wall)
Apron
(D/S)
Fig.1.4 (b) Standardized cross section view of headworks
5
Longitudinal section
Apron
Apron
Weir (U/S)
(U/S)
Riprap
Riprap
(U/S)
(U/S)
Cut-off wall
Scouring
sluice gate Apron
Apron Weir (U/S)
(U/S)
Devide Riprap
Riprap Wall (U/S)
(U/S)
Cut-off wall
Fig.1.4 (c) Standardized longitudinal cross section view of headworks
6
1.6 Basic Considerations of Headworks
In principle, headworks should have the necessary water intake

facilities, maintain safety from any external forces, harmonize with
flood control and water use of the river and be basically economical
structure.
The structures of headworks should be designed to secure the
intake with enough irrigation water at all times, to release flood flow
smoothly, to be safe from any external forces during flood and to
maintain the original river functions identical to previous functions.
The design of headworks must comply with relevant laws and
regulations of the country.The design of headworks should be
carried out by appropriate procedures with special attention to
interrelated aspects as mentioned previously.
At the basic design stage (Section 3.1), a general layout of each
component of headworks is determined. Then a detailed design of
each facility follows as Section 3.2. However through out the whole
design procedures, feedback of intermediate results should be made
if necessary to make each component harmonized as a whole.
General design procedures of headworks are shown in Fig. 1.5
7
Fig. 1.5 Flowchart for designing headworks
8
2. BASIC DESIGN INPUT DATA
Design of headworks needs input data that have good quality in different
stages of the study. The design of headworks has to identify kinds of data,
availability of data, quality of data in each stage. Headwork design not
only identifies input data but also assesses impacts that have to be tested
like effects of flood, upstream and downstream effects and others issues.
In this section basic design input data and the reasons for the
requirement of these data are briefly explained. This section helps the
engineer to understand what they are designing, what to observe
including impacts and other issues.
The necessary basic primary and secondary data have to be identified and
then to be collected. The collected data have to be examined. Planning is
the primary work in designing i.e. what data to collect, how to collect,
when to collect and where to collect. Data collection and examination has
to be considered not only for design and construction phase but also for
operation and maintenance aspects after construction. This is very
helpful in securing the headworks to function properly, to economize the
project during planning, design, construction and operation stages.
Keeping this in mind, it is important to carry out efficient & effective
planning considering the relationship between the basic design input data
& design, construction and O & M.
When basic design input data is not possible to be accessed with the
same method as explained in guideline, it is necessary to get the
information and data in another method. It is not recommendable to
design without ungrounded information and data.
2.1 Data for River Conditions

River conditions are the major factors to select design approach and
parameters. These data shows the target river morphology before the
design is done. This data includes river flow regime, river bed conditions,
and saltwater intrusions of tidal rivers.
2.1.1 River Flow Regime

River flow regime is concerned with the river geometry. This includes:
1. Discharge condition,
9
2. Water level and discharge,

3. Sedimentations
(1) Discharge Condition

Discharge condition is to understand and evaluate the river water flow
situation. It is important to design intake discharge, design intake level
and design flood discharge in Design Conditions explained in section
3.1.1.
A flow duration table (or curve) shall be prepared based on the
observation records of river discharge:
① 95-day discharge (probable discharge occurring more than 95 days in
a year),
② Ordinary discharge (probable discharge occurring more than 185 days
in a year),
③ Low discharge (probable discharge occurring more than 275 days in a
year),
④ Base flow (probable discharge occurring more than 355 days in a
year),
⑤ Yearly average discharge(average of yearly daily mean discharge),
⑥ Average discharge of irrigation period(average of daily mean discharge
during irrigation period),
⑦ Seasonable discharge variation(dry season discharge, wet season and
rainy season discharge)
When there are no records at the proposed site, a flow duration table
(curve) should be prepared using records obtained from the stations close
to the site on the same river or by transferring data from close to similar
gauged catchments.
< Supplementary explanation >

Data is required for planning. For example, Irrigation engineers have to
address the intended benefit of the area in consideration of the proposed
river.
In our country current condition, most of the rivers don’t have recorded
data for such condition. This will lead to collect information from local
community (elders). This approach has a limitation because of the
memory of the person with whom we discuss. This has to be corrected
after identification, pre-feasibility and detail study made after measuring
the flow at least weekly and monthly if possible daily by district and
10
kebele experts.
This data has to be supported by rainfall - run-off analysis (when there is
rainfall data of the area is available). Please refer to “Manual for Runoff
Analysis” in detail.
(2) Water Level and Discharge

Rating curve is prepared by using long-term records of water level and
discharge obtained from the data collected or analyzed from the previous
section (1).
In principle, discharge measurement should be applied by the current-
meter. When the current-meter is not available, float measurement
method can be applied.
1) Current meter method

The current meter method is a method of calculating discharge by
multiplying the flow area and the mean flow velocity observed by current
meter. The follows are noted on measuring the flow velocity.
① To increase the accuracy of measurement, both the water depth and

the mean flow velocity should be measured more than twice at the same
cross section if possible. If the results of measurements are quite different,
another measurement is required.
② In principle, the measuring points should be set at equal intervals on a
measuring line crossing the river. However, the intervals should be
reduced in a complex sectional feature or uneven velocity distribution
(Table 2.1).
③ In case of shallow (less than 75 cm) water depth, the one point method,
measuring at 60% of water depth, should be applied. When the water
depth is deeper than above, the two point method, measuring at 20% and
80% water depth, shall be applied.
④ The water depth measuring line should be set at each boundary of
dead water zone as shown in Fig.2.1
⑤ The discharge is the total of the numerical value obtaining by
multiplying the mean flow velocity in the measuring point by the small
cross sectional area that the mean velocity represents.
11
Table 2.1 Interval of measuring points for water depth and water velocity
Interval of measuring Interval of measuring
Width of water surface
points for water depth Points for water velocity
(B)m
(M)m (N)m
10~15% width of water
Less than 10 N=M
Surface
10~20 1m 2m
20~40 2 4
40~60 3 6
60~80 4 8
80~100 5 10
100~150 6 12
150~200 10 20
More than 200 15 30
Fig. 2.1 Velocity measuring point in the current meter method
Photo 2.1 Measuring by current meter method
2) Float measurement method

The float measurement method is a method of calculating discharge by
multiplying the flow area of planning point and the mean flow velocity
measured by the float. The measurement of flow velocity is calculated by
dividing the distance among two transversal lines by the time which a
float flow the section. The follows are noted on measuring the mean flow
velocity:
12
① The float measurement method is used when the current meter method
cannot be used,
② The transversal line is set more than two, and the interval is not less
than 50m basically. But the case of small and medium river, the
interval can be changed to not less than 10m,
③ There is the planning point between the transversal line of upstream
and the transversal line of downstream,
④ The measuring line of velocity of float is set in the direction of the flow
of the river from the transversal line of upstream,
⑤ The relation between width of surface water of river and the number of
measuring line of velocity of float is expressed in Table 2.4,
⑥ The point which the float starts is about 30 m upper from the
transversal line of upstream basically. But the case of small and
medium river, it can be changed for small rivers 5-10m, for medium
rivers 10-20m,
⑦ The mean flow velocity at the planning point is calculated by
multiplying velocity coefficient (Refer to Table 2.3) and average flow
velocity calculated based on the results of measurement in each
measuring line of velocity of float with time record.
Measuring line of
velocity of float
Start line
Transversal
Approaching line of
section about 5 ‐ upstream Planning
30m
Transversal
Measurement line of
section downstream
not less than 10‐50m
Fig. 2.2 Layout of float measurement method
13
Fig. 2.3 Float type and stick type for float method
Table 2.2 Selection criteria of float number and submerged depth of flow
Submerged
Water depth Number depth of float
～0.7m ①
0.7m～1.3m ② 0.5m
1.3m～2.6m ③ 1.0m
2.6m～5.2m ④ 2.0m
5.2m～ ⑤ 4.0m
Table 2.3 Velocity coefficient for float method

Number ① ② ③ ④ ⑤
Water depth (m) ～0.7 0.7～1.3 1.3～2.6 2.6～5.2 5.2～
Float Stick type
submerged depth of float (m) type 0.50 1.00 2.00 4.00
velocity coefficient 0.85 0.88 0.91 0.94 0.96
14
Table 2.4 Width of river and number of measuring line of velocity of float
100m～
Width of river ～20m 20m～100m 200m～
200m
Number of
measuring line of 5 10 15 20
velocity of float

The flow data is used for planning and design of headworks. Discharge
is the basic data for planning irrigation capacity. When Dam and
reservoir is planned not only minimum discharge but also annual data
is required for design. Design discharge is needed for the design of
stability and safety of headworks. Data about the level of water
throughout the year is required to decide the necessary design and
construct weir that will not to bring unacceptable water level raise.
When there are no measured data discussion from local community has
to be done through checking the flood mark, by taking survey of cross
section and river slope. The discharge can be calculated by Manning
formula:
Q=A·V
1 23 12
V R I
n
Where:, Q: Discharge (m3/s)

A: Cross-section area (m2)
V: Mean velocity (m/s)
I: Hydraulic gradient (River bed slope )
R: Hydraulic radius (m)
n: Coefficient of roughness (refer to reference)
This method doesn’t help us to know the probability year of the

discharge because it is only one time data. If rainfall data can be found,
then it is possible to support the result by rainfall run-off analysis.
Please refer to “Manual for Runoff Analysis” in detail.
(3) Sediment Load (if data are available)

River sediment must be measured in order to fix the sill elevation of the
intake, to decide the necessity of a settling basin, to design the scale and
15
frequency of sand removal from the settling

basin.
Sediment load can be divided into two
categories:
① Suspended load
② Tractable load (bed load)
Suspended load is part of the sediment
transport suspending in the river water
without touching the riverbed for a certain
period. Tractable load is part of the sediment
transport that is jumping on the riverbed or
moving along the riverbed. When the sill of an
intake is designed it has to be high enough to
avoid the suspended sand entry to a canal. Fig. 2.4 Uniform velocity
In general, the distribution of suspended
sand within a flow section is not even, so the following sampling method
should be applied to obtain reliable data:
① During small to medium floods, sampling should be done along several
measuring lines (at right angles to river flow) near the proposed intake
site,
② At each measuring line, the distribution of flow velocity is checked in
the vertical direction. The vertical section is then divided into several
sections with similar flow velocity. Samples should be taken at the center
of each section,
③ Furthermore, each measuring line should be divided horizontally into
several sections by flow velocity and samples should be taken at the
center of each section,
④ The quantity and grain size of the samples taken by the above method
should be recorded and analyzed. In addition, the tractable sand should
be estimated at several sections at 50 to 200 m intervals up to about 1
km upstream from the proposed site of the headworks.

The sediment load is crucial for design of Scouring sluice gate and
settlement basin. When there are no data and no time for measuring,
observation of the river and information have to be gathered from local
community (elders). In addition catchment data & experience, research,
16
model results and literature can be consulted to make the information

collected from the community more viable.
2.1.2 Condition of Riverbed
Data has to be collected regarding river bed conditions on ①condition of

thalweg, ② river bed slope and ③ river bed materials.
(1) Condition of thalweg

The river flood never flow uniformly covering all width of the river. The
water collection of flood flows fluctuates. The river thalweg, or stream
centerline, is formed after the floods. Therefore, the location of the
headworks should be selected at a site where the thalweg is stable and
located near the river bank where the intake is installed in the scheme.
The scouring sluices are set in the thalweg. Study has to be carried out
on the magnitude and frequency of floods, which may cause the
movement of bed materials of average grain size. The maximum flow
capacity should be estimated based on survey data on width, depth and
gradient of the existing thalweg.
Rivers that don’t have stable thalweg needs investigation of the moving
condition of the thalweg. When headworks is planned without weir type or
when the river channel at the proposed location of headworks is wide and
meandering, the following studies should be carried out: (a) The past
changes of stream centerline based on old topographic maps, river trail
maps and so on, (b) The characteristics of meandering river upstream and
downstream of the proposed site of headworks, (e) The condition of rock
foundation on the river bank and effects of scouring on the riverbed and
(d) The influence of river structures such as piers of bridges. In order to
understand these characteristics, a river survey of reaches upstream and
downstream of the proposed site of headworks is required.

Condition of thalweg is required for design of location. Particularly, it is
important for design without weir type. When there are no data and no
time for measuring information from local community has to be gathered.
According to river situation, if the discharge is not including flood and is
small and thalweg change is big, then it is better to make weir or change
weir location. If the discharge is big and thalweg change is not a problem,
17
then this modification is not desirable.
(2) Riverbed slope

The assumption of aggradations and degradation of the riverbed are
vitally necessary in order to determine the sill elevation of intake and to
design foundation of headworks and related structures. For this purpose,
stability and tendency of aggradations or degradation of riverbed should
be studied carefully.
Riverbed slope can be calculated by following formula.
Iavg = Havg / ∑L ……………………………….(F. 2.1 )

Where, Iavg: Average Riverbed slope
Havg: = 2 × ∑A / ∑L (m)
A: Individual area An = (Hn + Hn+1) / 2 × Ln (m2)
H: Accumulative height H = ELn – EL0 (m)
L: Distance (m)
EL: Elevation (m)
EL(m)
EL3
EL2
EL1
(A2) H3
H1 (A1) H2
(A0)
EL0
L0 L1 L2 L(m)
No.0 No.1 No.2 No.3
Fig. 2.5 Layout for Riverbed slope calculation

The riverbed slope data helps for design and to estimate the river bed
change. When there are no data and no time for measuring information
has to be gathered from local community (elders). Actually, it is difficult to
estimate the river bed situation and change, even if there is data.
(3) Riverbed Materials

Riverbed materials are the channel bottom of a stream or river where the
normal water flow occurs. Sampling should be done at several points at
200 to 500 m intervals upstream and downstream of the proposed
18
headworks in order to get grain size distribution, specific gravity,

maximum grain size (90 percent passing by weight) and average grain size
(60 percent passing by weight). All sampling points should be indicated
on a plan. The results of riverbed materials analysis are used to estimate
the roughness coefficient of the river section, to presume riverbed change,
to decide on the necessity of a settling basin, to design of scouring sluice
and detachability of the silt.

When there are no data or difficult to investigate during the design study
time due to flood in the river, the investigation should be done at
construction stage. Until that time, design can be done by using assumed
values.
2.2 Studies on the Influence of Flood Control and Water Use

Studies on the Influence of flood control and water use shall include flood
control plans determined by the basin/river authorities (like Awash basin
Authority). The study need to investigate the condition of upstream and
downstream drainage, condition of existing river structures and present
condition of river water utilization.
2.2.1 Flood Control Plans

Flood control plans are required to be designed by the basin/river
authorities in the river where the new headworks is proposed. The design
of high water discharge, high water level, cross section and the annual
schedule of the river improvement works, etc. have to be investigated for
sustainability of the scheme.

When there are no flood controls plans, design can be done freely or the
plan can be made by engineers responsible for design of headworks. It is
necessary to consider the situation of upstream and downstream to avoid
damage to those areas.
2.2.2 Situation of Upstream and Downstream Drainage

The situation of upstream and downstream drainage discharges into
rivers during the ordinary flow should be investigated in order to discover
the influence of rise of water level by weir upon upstream and
19
downstream drain ability. For this purpose, it is necessary to study the

function, scale and capacity of existing drainage facilities and the
situation of in-flow to the river.

The upstream and downstream drainage investigation may be easy but
consultation with local community is necessary.
2.2.3 Dikes, Bridges and Other Structures
The scale and dimensions of the structure of foot protection, span, etc. of
dikes, bridges and other structures should be investigated to clarify the
influence of flood.

Investigation on dikes, bridges and other structures are easy. Additional
information has to be gathered from local community and administration.
The result needs to get strict attention.
2.2.4 Present Condition of River Water Utilization

Present condition of river water utilization such as irrigation, hydropower,
fishery and others need to be investigated:
① The customary agreement on the construction of a weir, water balance

of upstream, downstream and flow restriction in the downstream
should be clarified. If it is necessary, then the present condition and
the customary agreement should be compared and cheeked,
② Fluctuation of water level due to power generation and customs of
rotational irrigation in the present water utilization condition, etc,
③ In the river, where the conservation of fishes are necessary, kind of
fishes, their quantity, migratory season of fishes etc. should be
investigated in order to use for the design of fish ways,
④ Other data related to current condition of river water utilization, such
as utilization of underflow, should be collected.

Present condition of river water utilization item is used for planning and
design. The investigation may be easy however discussion with the local
20
community and administration has to be done. (Give attention only on

applicable condition which are in the context of Ethiopia)
2.3 Geotechnical and Geological Investigations

Geological and geotechnical investigations shall include the type of
foundation material (e.g. rocks), chemical and physical condition of
foundation material, relevant geologic structures, the thickness, bearing
capacity, compressibility and hydraulic conductivity of overburden, the
ground water level and its condition.
Investigation on the foundations shall be carried out so as to establish the
suitability of the site for the structure, determine geotechnical design
parameters to design suitable foundation structures according to the
existing foundation material, and also to design superstructures
rationally considering ground conditions. The methods of these
investigations and tests are described hereunder.

This information is important for stability of the structures. The following
investigations shall be carried out in consideration of the cost and the
scale of project..
2.3.1 Drilling Water swivelベル

ウォータースイ
The purpose of drilling is to identify ワイヤーロープ

Wire rope
櫓（鋼製又は木製）
Stage
Winch
ウインチ
the type of riverbed material and ボーリングマシン

Drilling machine
Delivery hose ガードフェンス
Guard fence
デリバリーホース
stratifications of the ground, to take エンジン
Engine
samples for geotechnical analysis, and

ボーリングポンプ
Drilling pump
エンジン
Engine
to execute in situ tests in boreholes.

To supplement geological information サクションホース
Suction hose
掘削用水（清水又は泥水）
Water for drilling
obtained by drilling, geophysical

Casing pipe
ケーシングパイプ
又はドライブパイプ
or Drive pipe
techniques like electrical resistivity

test or a seismic survey, particularly
for large-scale headworks located on a Drilling rod
ボーリングロッド
wide river, is often applied effectively

together with drilling. Drilling sites Core tube
コアチューブ
shall be located at proper intervals not Reamer

リーマー
メタルクラウ
Metal crownン
only at the centerline of the diversion 又はダイヤビツト
or Diamond bit
GT-04
weir, but also at the apron Fig. 2.6 Drilling image
21
downstream and at the scouring sluices upstream and downstream of the

proposed structure. It is desirable that drilling sites be set in a
rectangular pattern so as to enable a geological map to be drawn. To stop
underflow of water, the area of investigation should be extended
sufficiently towards the abutments. For example, even when a floating
foundation is preferable, confirmation of foundation rock will be useful for
comparison of construction methods. Furthermore, in case of well or
caisson foundation, drilling at each location of base is effective in saving
construction cost by over sinking or cutting.

Laboratory test can be done by taking pit investigation since drilling test
is more or less costly for SSIP projects.
This item is very useful for foundation and bank design. When it is not
possible to collect data using drilling, pit opening manually can give
important useful data. The cost of this investigation method is relatively
cheap.
The design has to be done by laboratory result for undisturbed &
disturbed samples or estimating value from information of test pitting and
other information.
Resistivity test also can be an option.
2.3.2 Test Pitting

Test pits allow direct observation and appraisal of the soil strata and
geology of the foundation. Furthermore they enable sample collection
(both disturbed and undisturbed) and in situ bearing capacity tests. The
number of test pits shall be at least 3 (three) points (located two at banks
and one at river center). Additional pits upstream and downstream along
the center of weir axes helps.

This investigation gives very practical data. If a foundation and bank
investigation was not done during the study time, the foundation
information has to be collected by test pitting before construction. The
designer has to take into account not only data collected from test pit but
also information from secondary data sources such as discussion with the
local community.
22
2.3.3 Bearing Capacity Tests

The bearing capacity test is very important in design of headworks and
when conditions allow the following methods can be applied, some of
them described hereunder.
(1) Standard Penetration Test (SPT)

The standard penetration test is the simplest method to find the
properties of ground. It is commonly executed together with rotary core
drilling.
This method drives a sampling tube (split-
spoon sampler), outside diameter 51 mm
and inside 35 mm, separable in two, driven
at the head of the drilling rod with a weight
of 6.35 Kg falling 75 cm.
The number of blows required to penetrate
30 cm is counted, and called the N-value. A
disturbed soil samples for mechanical Picture 2.2 Standard Penetration
analysis can also be collected in the tube

during the test.
The relationship between N-value and the relative density of the ground
both for sand and clay by Terzaghi-Peck is shown in Table 2.5.
In general, the standard penetration test gives accurate results for sandy
ground. For clayey ground, the bearing capacity should be calculated
using the results of an unconfined compressive strength test on samples.
Table 2.5 Judgment of N value
Sand Clay
N value Consistency N value Consistency
0~4 Very loose 0~2 Very soft
4~10 Loose 2~4 soft
10~30 Medium 4~8 Medium
30~50 Dense 8~15 stiff
More than 50 Very dense 15~30 Very stiff
More than 30 Hard
The relationship between the unconfined compressive strength qu and

the N-value is empirically explained as follows.
qu  1.22N (t / m2 ) ………..……………………………………….. (F. 2.2)
23
If the length of the drilling rod is long, this may influence the results of
the standard penetration test. Correction of the measured N-value shall
be made by the following formula:
N’= N (l≦20m)
N’= (1.06 – 0.003l)N (l>20m) ……………………………………(F. 2.3)
where, N': corrected N-value

N: measured N-value
l : length of rod
In addition, the N-value is useable to estimate the internal frictional angle
of sandy ground and so on which is useful for foundation design.
Therefore, the N-value shall always be measured at the time of drilling.
Long-term allowable bearing capacity in relation to N-value is shown in
Section 3.2.4.
24
Fig. 2.7 Sample of boring log sheet
25
(2) Loading Test

There are two types of loading tests: the plate bearing test and the pile
head loading test. Both are to confirm artificial failure of the ground by
loading up to ultimate bearing capacity. The loading methods include;
① Direct loading,
② Jacking method using anchor frame, and
③ Loading method using lever.
In the test, loading is gradually increased, and load intensity, time, and
settling depth are observed. Then, a record diagram should be drawn to
be analyzed.
At the investigation of headworks, plate loading test is rare, but a pile
head loading test is desirable after pile driving test in case of a pile
foundation, especially of steel pipe piles.

This is also very important for design. In this study, bearing capacity of
the foundation can be known. There are two methods to do this standard
penetration test and loading test. The later needs machine and it is
expensive. When these tests are not practicable, design should be done
using standard value of Table 3.11, other project data or text values.
2.3.4 Investigation on Riverbed Deposit

Over a long period, the course of the main channel and thalweg of rivers
may move due to fluctuation flood discharges. Riverbed deposits should
be investigated based on geological data and information in order to
prevent construction failure. Dewatering could prove to be impossible
during excavation for the foundation because of the water path in the trail
of the thalweg where stone and gravel layers exist, and/or the lower layer
below the cofferdam is broken by piping.
2.3.5 Groundwater Investigation

To assess the influence of construction of headworks on drainage of
nearby farmland and the water level in wells, the ground water conditions
should be investigated by a field permeability test, etc.

This is very important for design and to select construction method. When
these tests are not done but groundwater is observed, it is necessary to
26
consider dewatering at construction time.
2.4 Assessment & Planning for Construction Works
Assessment for construction works should be conducted on the following

items, which are necessary for construction planning.
① Meteorology, surface water, groundwater, riverbed conditions
② Construction equipment and materials
③ Transportation of equipment and materials (write down for materials
such as quality, quantity, location as well as its availability)
④ Power source for construction
⑤ Availability of adequate labor for construction
⑥ Construction material quantity & quality
2.4.1 Meteorology, Surface Water, Groundwater and Riverbed

Conditions
Meteorology and surface water should be thoroughly investigated because
of their importance in deciding the construction schedule. Based on the
assessment on annual rainfall and river runoff, workable days and
periods, water level and discharge of diversion channels, elevation of
cofferdam, etc. should be determined. Flood runoff pattern should also be
investigated in order to decide timing of interruption of works during flood.
Data on runoff, water level and flow velocity of floods in the construction
period of the cofferdam are essential to make a proper construction plan.
For example, the construction method for a cofferdam will differ
depending on the characteristics of water level changes whether they are
almost constant or fluctuate widely, and if fluctuation is large, what the
cycle period is.
Rainfall and temperature, etc. should be fully investigated in order to
estimate workable days and to make a construction plan. Especially in
the cold areas, snowfall and temperature in winter season are important.
Investigations on the condition of the riverbed deposit and groundwater
which are helpful for construction are described in Section 2.3.4 & 2.3.5.

This item is in consideration of construction schedule. These
investigations may be easy. Construction time of headworks is better in
dry season.
27
2.4.2 Construction Equipment and Materials

Construction materials include ready mixed concrete, steel materials and
timber, etc. The supply situation of factory products should be checked
on the possibility to cope with sudden requirement for large quantities as
well as urgent requirements by the change of design. Availability of
construction equipment considerably influences the construction
schedule and results. Investigation should be done on the availability of
construction equipment with the function and capacity to suit the site
conditions, availability of spare parts, and necessity of stand-by
equipment during construction period.

This item is in consideration of construction. In the present situation, it is
easy to get equipment and materials for construction of headworks of
small scale irrigation project. However, it is necessary to collect the
information frequently, sometimes, price change happens, supply of
material becomes difficult. Particularly industrial input. If it is necessary,
supplying main industrial inputs like cement by the client should be
considered.
2.4.3 Transportation of Equipment and Materials

Local roads and bridges should be thoroughly checked in order to
transport a lot of heavy and/or long equipment and materials including
construction materials, factory products such as steel gates, construction
machinery, etc. If necessary, roads or bridges have to be repaired or newly
constructed. Otherwise, heavy and/or long equipment and materials may
be transported disassembled.

This makes construction material transportation easy. In the present
situation, most of the site is far from asphalt road. Necessity of access
road should be considered.
2.4.4 Power Source for Construction

Considerable power demand may arise during the construction of
headworks for a short period, and power source is generally required.
Therefore, power source, location of distribution lines and diverting points
should be investigated. When electric power cannot be obtained easily,
28
independent power generation or an internal-combustion engine may be

used.

In current Ethiopian condition, electric power can be generated from
small or medium generators for some construction works.
2.4.5 Availability of Enough Labor for Construction

Household survey to know the availability of productive forces; labor at a
reasonable price, in which month and so on has to be studied for the
intended work. Works also has to be classified for community
participation.
2.5 Topographical Survey

Topographical survey for headworks should be done on the following
items.
① Topographic survey
② Longitudinal and cross sectional survey at headworks
③ Necessary survey for temporary works
④ Collection of related topographic maps
2.5.1 Topographic Survey

Topographic surveys are necessary not only for construction of the
headworks itself but also for the planning and design of cofferdams and
temporary facilities, etc. Curvature conditions of the river thalweg and
elevation of the riverbed near the site should be surveyed as follows:
Scope: 1.5 times upstream meander length

1.0 times downstream meander length
Scale: river upstream and downstream: 1/1,000~1/3,000

At the headworks site: 1/200~1/500 for detailed survey.
The contour lines on the map should be drawn at 0.25-0.5 m intervals for
the riverbed and 1.0 m interval for the other parts.
29
2.5.2 Longitudinal and Cross-Section Survey

Profile and cross-section maps of the river are
used for the design headworks and for hydraulic
calculations such as of backwater.
Prior to the commencement of surveying, the
benchmark elevation to be used for the planning
of the headworks should be adjusted to the
benchmark used by organization in charge of
benchmark or basin/river administrator. Picture 2.3 Cross-Section survey
During the cross-section surveys, the flood mark of both side of the river
around headworks should be indicated and incorporated for hydraulic
calculations. This can be done based on elderly flood mark and some
safety factor. The extent of this surveying along the river courses at least
has to be 500m to each side of upstream and downstream of the site of
headworks but effects shall be seen to decide the effect of flood.
Scale and interval:

Three cross sections; one weir axis, two upstream and downstream at
20m upstream and downstream of the site of headworks has to be done.
Every natural change useful for the structure design with its profile and
cross section survey for the headworks has to be done.
Drawing scale for cross section; horizontally 1/100~1/500 and vertically
1/100~1/200 is acceptable.
Cross-section surveys of at upstream and downstream for 200 m interval
and the drawing scale by 1/100~1/500 has to be done.
Drawing scale for longitudinal profile; vertically 1/100 and horizontally
1/1,000~l/2,000 adjusting the scale of the topographic map.
In addition, benchmarks are recommended to be set at both sides of the
headworks and at least two in the range to be able to seen from
headworks. Please confirm with EMA Bench marks located around it.
2.5.3 Surveys for Other Temporary Works and Compensations

Surveying for topographic maps at a scale of 1/200-1/500 should be done
for planning and design of cofferdams, temporary facilities for concrete
works, construction roads, and excavation of aggregate materials. The
contour interval should be the same as for the topographic survey
mentioned above.
30
Profiles and cross-sections required for estimation of earthwork volume

are prepared following the standard longitudinal and cross section survey
mentioned above.
2.5.4 Collection of Topographic and Other Related Maps

Prior to field investigations and surveys, topographic maps and other
related maps around the site of headworks should be collected in order to
prepare schedule to make a preliminary design using a topographic map
(scale 1/25,000~1/50,000) and present land use maps. However, the
accuracy of these maps should be checked to minimize the mistakes. Map
from Ethiopian Mapping Agency, topographic and other related maps
issued by the national survey organization should be obtained.

This item helps to for design consideration and construction. During
construction, the bench mark used at survey time should be checked and
strengthen or transferred to suitable place, make it concrete etc.
2.6 Data for Temporary Works

The collection of hydro metrological data such as rainfall and river water
level prior to construction is very important not only for the headworks
construction but also for temporary constructions.
2.6.1 Annual Maximum Daily Rainfall and Annual Maximum Hourly

Rainfall
These data are necessary to estimate flood discharge and flood stage for
planning of temporary works. Since the estimation will be done by
statistical analysis, as much data as possible should be collected. The
number of years required for the estimation varies depending on required
provable value, but data more than 30 to 50 years is desirable.
Further, the smaller the catchment area is, the more records on annual
maximum hourly rainfall or annual maximum 10 minutes rainfall are
necessary.

In our case this has to be done easily by area-velocity method for
construction period months and the temporary diversion has to be decided
in this context.
31
2.6.2 Annual Daily Rainfall

Data of annual daily rainfall at least over 10 years are necessary to
presume flow regime. When discharge is analyzed using a tank or other
model (please refer to “Manual for Runoff Analysis” for the details of the
tank model), data for the design year and 3 additional years are
recommended to obtain stability of the model.
2.6.3 Environmental Impact Assessment

The Construction of' headworks may give variety to the natural
environment (scenery, ecosystem of animals and plants, etc.) and life of
people living around. Therefore, the environment around the site should
be investigated in advance. The results of the study from previous
sections should be effectively utilized for planning, design, construction
and maintenance of headworks. In addition, muddy water may flow into
the river downstream during construction of the headworks and may
cause adverse effects on inhabitants downstream and life in the water by
mud increasing and siltation. Therefore, the degree of adverse effects on
fish habitat in the river and other aspects (resting and feeding area of fish
and birds) should also be investigated. Special care should be taken in
selection of construction methods and periods which cause noise
pollution and vibration, etc. to residents around the site. The routes for
transportation of equipment and construction materials by large-sized
dump trucks should be carefully studied to prevent noise and vibration
effects.
32
3. DESIGN OF HEADWORKS
3.1 Basic Design

At this stage, appropriate basic design criteria must be established
to ensure the structure that can perform the intended functions.
3.1.1. Design Conditions

Design water intake discharge, design intake water levels, design
flood discharge and design flood levels must be known for the design
of headworks. The height of fixed structures and the future level at
which the riverbed will be stable must be studied in order to set
appropriate design conditions.
(1) Design water intake discharge

The design water intake discharge is the intake discharge at
maximum design intake. The intake discharge that governs the weir
design and the dimensions of the intake must be set considering the
design maximum intake of the overall irrigation. In other words,
Irrigation plan is decided according to beneficiary area, crop pattern,
crop water requirment, the base flow and the amount of usable water
from the river. Design water intake discharge is decided based on the
following flow chart,
33
Fig. 3.1 Flowchart for determining design water intake discharge
Please refer to “Guideline for Irrigation Master Plan Study

Preparation on Surface Water Resources”.

【Base flow calculation at the point of intake can be conducted by
watershed ratio method (Catchment area method) to design water
intake discharge 】
Based on the standard base flow, the base flow is calculated by

watershed ratio method. The formula of this method is as follows,
D = D s ×A p / A r
34
D : Base flow (m 3 /s)

D s : Standard base flow in river basin of project site (m 3 /s)
A r : River basin (km 2 )
A p : Catchment area of the project (km 2 )
Based on the base flow, the amount of usable water is calculated.
The formula is as follows,
W = D × K  Qdw
W : The amount of usable water (m 3 /s),
D : Base flow (m 3 /s),
K : Coefficient of released flow for downstream ecology (0.7～0.9),
Q d w : The existing design water intake discharge in the downstream of the
project (downstream demanded water). In case of using actual
measurement data, it should be subtracted from base flow.
The design water intake discharge is decided based on the amount of

usable water, The design water intake discharge should be within
the amount of usable water and be considered from the relationship
between beneficiary area, crop pattern and crop water requirement.
(2) Design intake water level

The absolute requirement for the design intake water level is given
as the water level required to be secured at the start of the canal set
in the irrigation plan.
In case of intake on weir, the design intake water level must be the
highest of the following:
① The total of the water level required to be secured at the canal
start plus the total of the head loss between the intake and the canal
start; or ② the total of the intake threshold height from the bottom
the silt scouring sluice to prevent sediment inflow and the intake
depth. In case of natural water intake, consideration is given to
fluctuation of river water levels and base flow during the irrigation
period occurring at the probability of once in every 10 years is
adopted in Japan as the design intake level. Assuming that this base
level flow coincides with the timing when the design intake volume is
required, final design intake level is then determined so as to satisfy
the requirements of ① and ② mentioned previously. As stated earlier,
the choice of design intake level is not only related to the location of
35
the headworks, but it is also affected by loss of head that varies

depending on the distance between the intake and the canal start,
existence of a slit basin and the flow velocity of the intake (size of the
intake). Therefore, the final decision must be made after a series of
trial calculations and reviews of various factors. At the preliminary
design stage, it is recommended to take 1.8 to 2.3 times of the intake
velocity head (V 2 /2g) as the loss of head at the intake.

Design intake water level is used for consideration of the
headworks position. The headworks position has to be located
upper than this level.
(3) Design flood discharge

The design flood discharge is decided in accordance with the river
control plan. In other cases, the design flood discharge is decided on
the basis of the known discharge capacity of the target river. If there
is an experience of flood greater than discharge capacity of the target
river in the past, then the design dischage is decided on the basis of
the flood.
1) Decision of design flood discharge

Headworks structures (the weir in particular being a structure
across the river) need to be stable enough to withstand floods while
at the same time not being a serious obstacle to disturb the flow of
floods. The design flood discharge and the design flood level
explained in the following sections are the basic values for
calculations stability of external force and stress. They are also
basic values in deciding the features of the structure.
Design flood discharge has to be decided from the ① past flood
discharge data, ② the maximum flood in the past based on flood
mark or discharge capacity of the river by slope area method or
③ flood (1/50 probability year) by run-off analysis.
36
Fig. 3.2 Flowchart for selecting design flood discharge
37
Wherever the proposed siting of the headworks may form an obstacle

to the normal flow of the river it is necessary to take measures to
expand river sections in the vicinity of the proposed site.

There has to be sound Judgement on the basis of regionalization;
condition of the site and in consultion with other design etc.
(4) Design flood level

If the target river is under a river control plan or it is likely to be
incorporated in such plan in the near future, then the design flood
level is set in accordance with the target plan. In other cases, the
design flood level should be the level at the proposed site when the
design flood discharge flows.

Design flood level is an input for design of stability, safety and
consideration for influence to upstream in the absence of river
control plan.
Design flood level is calculated from design discharge on
condition of after headworks is constructed.
H e = (Q d /CL) 2 / 3 from Q d = CL H e 3/2
H e = H d +H a v
H a v = V a 2 /2g
V a = Q d / L (h+H d )
H e = H d +(Q d ) 2 /[L(h+H d )] 2 /(2g),
Design flood level at weir = H d + Elevation of weir crest
Where H e : Total energy head (m)
H d :Design head (Water depth on the crest) (m)
H a v : Approach velocity head (m)
V a : Approach velocity (m/s)
Q d : Design flood discharge (m 3 /s)
C : 1.7 Discharge coefficient
L : Length of weir (m)
h: weir height (m)
g: 9.8m/s 2 gravity acceleration
38
H a v =V a 2 /2g
Qmax He Hd
Sediment
h
Weir
Design flood levels at other place are calculated by Manning

formula. However, it is possible to take some cross section and
use non-uniform flow equation.
dh Q 2 d  1  n 2V 2
 i     0
dx 2 g dx  A2  R 4 3
Where i :Bed slope
h: Water depth (m)
X: Length towards the downstream along the canal bed (m)
Q: Discharge (m 3 / s)
A: Cross-section area (m 2 )
g: Acceleration due to gravity (m/ s 2 )
: Coefficient of energy correction (  = 1.1, is used in general but
 = 1.0 may be used for simple calculation )
n: Coefficient of Manning roughness
V: Mean velocity (m/s)
R: Hydraulic Mean Radius (m)
(5) Study of riverbed evolution

To prevent the function of the headworks from deteriorating due to
riverbed evolution, it is necessary to study future riverbed evolution
in the vicinity of the proposed location of the headworks.
39
1) Summary
It is extremely important to predict the future stable riverbed to
decide the height of the water intake sill.
① First, it is necessary to investigate the existing condition
whether there is balanced retrogression or aggrandization,
② Second, it is necessary to assess the variation of the bed that
would occur when other structures are constructed upstream or
downstream or when river improvement is carried out.
2) Natural conditions of riverbed formation

The natural condition of the riverbed is the result of the following
three elements.
① Horizontal distance and the head from the source to the
estuary,
② Topographical, geotechnological and botanical conditions and
erosion characteristics of the river basin,
③ Characteristics of rainfall distribution, discharge, volume, wave
pattern and its frequency.
Out of the above three conditions, condition ① is a significant
restraint in that the surface level of the tributary river must always
be higher than the parent river or sea surface level.
Agro‐ecology or characteristic
Rainfall of the source of a river
Collapsed sediment
Discharge amount
Channel erosion Sediment amount
Riverbed formation
downstream
Fig. 3.3 Flow chart of riverbed formation downstream
The flow chart in Fig. 3.3 describes the conditions ② and ③ above.
Usually local characteristics such as those of rainfall distribution
and collapse of sediment amount are extremely indefinite. But the
effect of the occurrence probability of these phenomena is rather
40
significant in upstream areas.

Due to the slow speed in the migration of sediment downstream, the
amount of sediment below the point of collapse gradually attains an
average value. The change in flow from supercritical flow to
subcritical flow would also promote the balance of sediment amount,
with the downstream riverbed formed by a sediment amount
controlled by the flow strength. Furthermore, the variation of local
tractional forces would cause variation in grain distribution of
sediment downstream. In this respect, grain size distribution of
erosion products as well as wear occurring to the material in the
course of moving downstream must be taken into account.
3) Effect of river structures on the riverbed

Construction of any structure in the river (such as headworks, check
dam, or bed compaction work, the execution of river improvement
work or quarrying of gravels) will cause secondary variation of the
riverbed (not due to the natural phenomenon, but rather artificial
causes). This results in the formation of a newly balanced bed in
response to the new condtions of flow. Generally, such secondary
formation of the riverbed has the following tendencies:
① Downstream of such a structures a lowering of the riverbed may
occur as a result of change in river hydraulics forming the
riverbed. This trend will gradually extend to downstream,
② The bed upstream of such a structure tends to rise,
③ If the existing water intake weir downstream is demolished due to
integration of the water intake with other facilities, etc., then the
settlement of the riverbed would occur. This settlement will
gradually will be extended upstream,
④ If a large volume of gravel is quarried from the riverbed, then
settlement of the riverbed will gradually occur both upstream and
downstreams,
⑤ If the tractive force is changed due to shortening of the flow route
by river improvement, then it will affect riverbed formation,
4) Points in investigating riverbed evolution(it has to be in Ethiopia

condition and simple way)
It is necessary to check the following points to understand the
riverbed evolution:
41
① Planar contour of river

The stability of the watercourse needs to get special attention.
Rivers have a habit to stabilize their courses through meandering.
In the investigation, it is necessary to check whether the existing
river section is a simple section or a complex section, whether the
course at the time of normal flow is regular or braided (forming a
type of network), and where discharge passes at the time of
flooding.
Understanding ofthe existing conditions such as the formation of
gravel dunes, etc in detail would help significantly in the study of
riverbed evolution.
The use of aerial photographs is helpful. The gravel dunes
mentioned in this section may be defined as a contour of the
riverbed beginning from the pool and ending at the sand bank.
One half of the meandering shape is called a gravel dune.
② Profile gradient
Profiel gradient is desirable to obtain the correct profile of the
river. Riverbed evolution tends to occur at the points where the
profile varies, the profile gradient has an important value in
forecasting future riverbed variation.
In addition to the study of the profile gradient it is valuable to
obtain information on the past variation of the gradient as well as
the changes in grain diameters of the sediments in relation to
distribution along the longitudinal axis of the river.
③ Profile gradient is also desirable to obtain the results of any
sediment sampling tests conducted in the past. Such information
can be used for analysis of the watercourse as well as providing
valuable clues to understand changes in the watercourse.
When taking samples take a record of the location, time and date
of course. The information on past floods including the scale and
number of recurrences and comparative information on the
changes in the riverbed materials in the past and at present is
very important to understand variation in the watercourse.
5) Method of assessing riverbed evolution

(a) Necessary information
Generally, the following items are necessary for analyzing river flow
that contains sediment.
42
① Flow section and existing riverbed gradient,

② Roughness coefficient and grain size distribution of bed material,
③ If any structures for water use exist, then features of such
structures,
④ Control section H-Q relations,
⑤ Assumed quantity of sediment, and grain distribution.
Besides, consideration should be given to past records of discharge,
bed evolution and the administration and operation of other water
use facilities. However, all of this detailed information is rarely
available. So it is important to examine the reason and justification
of the results and the method of analysis of each item based on the
purpose of the analysis and the available information.
(b) Types of analysis
There is an analytic solution when the flow is uniform flow or
non-uniform with simple alteration of cross-section. In reality, it is
rare to be able to adopt this kind of simplification. In general, the
most commonly adopted method is to divide the river into short
sections and to carry out the calculation on each section. This
method may be classified into four types of calculations combining
of various elements, i.e. either uniform or non-uniform flow for the
basic flow formula, and either assumption of uniform grain diameter
or calculation by each grain diameter for sediment load. The
combination and the primary aims of these analyses are summarized
in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1 Analysis methods for riverbed evolution

Points of Analysis Basic equations
Transient fluctuation Basic equation of unsteady
phenomena by time and by flow, Equation of tractive
( I ) location of flow, riverbed sediment volume by particle
and grain size distribution size, Continuous equation of
riverbed and grain size
Transient fluctuation Basic equation of unsteady
phenomena by time and by flow, Equation of tractive
location of flow and riverbed sediment volume by same
(II )
particle size
Continuous equation of
riverbed
Fluctuation of riverbed and Basic equation of
(III)
Tendency of predominance non-uniform flow, Equation
43
large-diameter grain
by of tractive sediment volume
location by particle size, Continuous
equation of riverbed and
grain size
Fluctuation of riverbed Basic equation of
assuming that non-uniform flow, equation
constant-diameter of grains of tractive sediment volume
(IV)
predominate in a section of by a particle size and
the river Continuous equation of
riverbed.
Among the four combinations given in Table 3.1, (I) is appropriate to

analyze the situation taking into consideration the flood
characteristics at the time of a large scale flood or abnormal
phenomenon generated by operation of the scouring sluice gate on a
river in which the grain size distribution of the bed ranges widely.
(II) is the proper method to assess, abnormal variation of the bed and
flow when the gate is operated at points where the grain diameter is
comparatively uniform, such as an estuary. (III) is for analysis of a
relatively wide section of river or in case of retrogression with the
armoring due to the disruption of the movement of sediments by a
structure such as a dam in the upstream section. This situation
assumes a local deviation of grain size. (IV) is the most common and
the most concise and proper method for analysis or assessment of
short sections. It should be sufficient to use either (III) or (IV) in the
study of riverbed evolution or stabilization in an ordinary river.
6) Method of sampling of riverbed materials

Samples of the riverbed materials provide the basic data and
information for the estimation of the roughness coefficient, variation
of riverbed and for decisions on the
necessity of a settling basin.
Although it depends on the scale of
the river being investigated, the
normal method of sampling is
carried out at intervals of 200 - 500
meters for several samples (2 - 3
points horizontally and 2 – 3 points
vertically). Samples taken should P i c t u r e 3 . 1 S a m p l i n g o f r i v e r be d m a t e r i a l s
be subjected to the grain size
44
analysis and a check on specific gravities. The location of sample

taking should be clearly marked on the relevant plan or map. The
selection of the sampling spot and the method of sample taking
should be in accordance with the criteria shown in Table 3.2.
Table 3.2
Key points Remarks
① To avoid the curve portion of Flow of river is not
river where curvature radius is uniform, and the thalweg
small, fluctuates from left to right
Selection ② To select the point near swingingly. Due to the
or effect of secondary flows
thalweg (lowest part of valley),
sampling and locational difference of
point ③ To avoid sandy gravel dunes tractive force, significant
and the place where scouring change of particle size in
happens cross section occurs. It is
required to avoid it.
① To avoid collection of cobbles Distribution condition of
the site, which is outside the large-sized cobbles, which
grain size distribution of the greatly affects the grain
riverbed surface, size distribution, is
To record particle size and important data. Sampling
distribution condition of these from two portions, i.e., the
stones. riverbed surface and
② To collect only the riverbed subsurface layer and
analysis is of these two
surface portion after excluding
portions are especially
cobbles. Surface layer thickness
important in case of
is that for the maximum grain
size (90 percent diameter by considering selective
traction and estimation of
weight). Average space is to be
stable riverbed.
1.0 × 1.0m.
The sample taken is to be divided
Sampling by quartering method and
method enough volume of sample to yield
a representative value must be
used, If grain size is small, 35 kg
is the sample.
However, if grain size is larger,
larger sample must be taken
relative to the grain size.
③ To collect sub-layer part of
riverbed. Two sampling points
are required at 1. 0m and 2.0m
deep from surface of riverbed.
Plan dimension of sampling is
1.0m × 1.0m and thickness of
sampling at each point is to be
the nearly same as maximum
grain size.
45

Riverbed materials is used for design and consideration of
influence to upstream. Implementation will be site specific.
3.1.2 Position of Headworks
The site for constructing a headworks must be selected in

consideration of the river condition and the irrigation command area.
The site should be such that the required water intake function as
well as the stability of the structure and convenience for operation
and maintenance are achieved.
(1) Points of selecting Headworks position

The site selected for the headworks should be the best possible place
after studying the following points:
① Availability of a stable thalweg close to the bank at the
proposed position of water intake,
② Sufficient water intake must be feasible even during the dry
season,
③ Least sediment inflow during water intake,
④ Least effect of weir construction on up and downstream
sides,
⑤ Stability of the structure can be expected with economical
construction costs,
⑥ Conveniente for operation and maintenance,
⑦ Look for additional other referances such as IDD manual,
Civil engineering hand book, etc.
Basically, it is extremely important to satisfy item ① from the above

points for the selection of the position of the headworks. It is
reasonable to consider the energy of flood. It is so enormous that any
artificial means such as the adjustment of gates to divert the
working direction of such energy or to attempt to divert the thalweg
is practically impossible. Therefore, any sites where the position of
the existing thalweg is remote from the bank or tends to move are not
appropriate for the water intake. A stable thalweg can be regarded as
having a stable riverbed against flood for many years and the
46
situation is expected to continue barring the implementation of large

scale river channel works, and thus a consistent water intake can be
anticipated. Therefore, the stability of a thalweg is crucial in siting a
headworks. In investigating the stability of a thalweg, it is important
to study conditions to a considerable extent both upstream and
downstream concerning the history of the main flow channel in
particular the condition of gravel dunes. The construction cost of the
headworks will generally depend on the volume of intake, width of
the weir and the condition of the ground on which the foundations of
the structure will be set. The cost variation due to variation in the
intake volume caused by the position of the headworks, variation in
the river width, the geotechnical conditions for the foundations and
the construction cost of the headrace channel must be carefully
compared before the position of the headworks is finally decided.
(2) Process of selecting Headworks position

The following process must be checked to select the position of the
headworks:
① The headrace is planned when the maximum required water to
the irrigation area is established. The position at which the
water level in the river becomes equal to the one at the
upstream end of the proposed headrace is found out. This
position is the first assumption for the proposed headworks,
② In the up stream of the first assumed position, the spot to
ensure sufficient intake and satisfy the condition of sediment
control during flood is generally the vicinity just downstream
center point of the outer side of a loop in the river. This would
be the position of the intake.
Fig. 3.4 Appropriate Intake Position

③ The next step is to decide the design intake level. It should
satisfy the requirement of ① above as well as the required
conditions for preventing sediment influx and for the settling
basin,
47
④ To prevent sediment influx during water intake, the weir must

be designed to make the flow velocity upstream of the
headworks at 0.2m/sec. This condition can be achieved with a
minimum of consideration and is recommended to be studied,
⑤ For the settling basin, it is safe to consider the necessary water
head to enable natural desilting to be 3.0 meters or more,
⑥ For the prevention of sediment influx, it is desirable to set the
height of the intake sill higher than the original bed at 1/6 of
the maximum flood depth.
It is important to decide the position and the intake level after
comprehensive review of the above items. Attention should be given
to the fact that even if the intake level is higher than the temporary
level in procedure ① above, it is still possible to absorb flow energy
midway along the headrace by way of drop structures etc. It is
further advantageous in that other structures (such as diversion,
branching or inverted siphons, etc.) can be planned. Most problems
in agricultural irrigation are caused from sediment inflow. Therefore,
it is essential to place maximum emphasis on preventing sediment
influx.
3.1.3 Method, Location and Type of Water Intake
The arrangement of the selected water intake, position of intake and

type of weir etc need to take into consideration the proposed area
and its vicinity.
(1) Method of water intake

The method of water intake can be either natural intake, which takes
in water at the natural water level of the lake or river or intake by
weir constructed to maintain a constant water level. The selection
must be either one of these two in consideration of various
conditions of the river. It is important to adopt the natural intake
including a stable water level in case of a lake. In case of a river,
along with the requirement of a stable intake level, consideration
should be given to the possibility of a drop in the water level due to
scouring of the bed in front of the intake or inflow of sediment due to
a rise of the bed. When intake is adopted by way of a weir,
consideration must be given to a structure which secures the design
48
intake volume, prevents influx of sediment during the intake period,

and that does not disturb the movement of sediment during flood.
(2) Location of intake

1) In principle, the intake is installed directly upstream of the weir to
take in water from the thalweg. In case of intake from a rivers it is
common to get a considerable amount of sediment during the
irrigation period and the piling of sediment at the scouring sluice in
front of the intake at the time of flood. It is essential to select the
location of the intake that can ensure flushing of sediment and easy
the maintenance of the thalweg. Where there is no possibility of
sediment inflow, there are cases when the intake may be established
at a distant point while a weir constructed to maintain the required
intake level. In this case, comprehensive study should be made in
respect to future changes in the flow regime or thalweg due to the
installation of a weir,
2) The intake of water at both banks is considered possible when the
intake levels of both sides are almost equal, the intake site is at a
straight segment of the river, river width is relatively narrow and
sediment load is very low or when raising of water level by a movable
weir is relatively large. However, in such cases problems occur on
one side through large deposits of sediment despite the fact that the
intake of water on the other side performs favorably.
When the stability of the thalweg is sufficiently confirmed, however,
intakes at both sides may be considered feasible as shown in Fig. 3.5,
and merits study.
Fig. 3.5 Example of both side intake (Inuyama headworks, Japan)
49
(3) Type of weir and direction of weir axis

The decision on whether to adopt a fixed type or floating type weir
will depend on the level of bedrock, necessity for a complete cut-off,
and the condition of scouring. The weir can be constructed directly
on the bedrock when the bedrock is relatively shallow or directly on
the natural sediment or gravels on the riverbed when the bedrock is
deep or does not exist at allthe former weir is called the fixed type
while the latter is called the floating type. The first priority to be
considered in selecting the weir type is the construction cost. The
construction cost must be based on a thorough study on the
necessity of complete cut-off and the safety against scouring. In
principle, the weir should be constructed on a straight axis
perpendicular to the river. The type should be selected taking into
account the conditions of water control and utilization. The reason
that the weir should be constructed at right angles to the river flow
is due to advantages of economy and ensuring the flushing function
of the scouring sluice. Weir types are:
① fully movable,
② combined weir which is partially movable and fixed,
③ fully fixed.
The final selection of the weir type depends on the consideration of
economy and ensuring the intake function. Classification of weir
could be due to stability factors, construction material, control of
surface flow, function and geometry of control section. Usually the
economics is the main reason for the selection of weir type, which is
influenced by the availability of sufficent construction material at
close proximity and availability of skilled and unskilled labor at site
and duration of construction time. It is to the designer to select the
best one satisfying the maximum explained conditions.
1) Stability Factor
(a) Gravity Weir: The weir depends on its weight for countering uplift
pressure due to seepage. The weight of the weir body and/or floor is
higher than the uplift pressure due to head of seepage water
(subsurface flow) under weir. It is used on permeable soil.
(b)Non Gravity Weir: This type of weirs constructed on the piles (cut
offs) and other pressure defusing mechanisms for it's stability
against uplift force from the subsurface flow. It needs careful design
50
and reduces material cost for construction.
2) Construction Material factor

(a) Rock-fill weir: Upstream and down stream rock fill laid in the
form of glacis with few intervening core walls. This is economical
when enough rock is available at site. It is simple in construction.
F i g . 3.6 Rock-fill weir
(b) Gabion weir: Gabion boxes filled with rocks. It is economical and
easy in construction where rock is available in required amount at or
nearby site. It is widely used for river training diversion, storage etc.
Fig. 3.7 Gabion weir
(c) Masonry weirs: Ti1e weir wall and the solid apron constructed
from masonry wall embedded in cement mortar. It is easy in
construction to provided the material and the skilled (mason)
available at site.
Fig. 3.8 Masonry weir
(d) Cyclopean Concrete/Concrete weirs: The whole structure

constructed out of concrete or for economical purposes. The inner
most part is filled with cyclopean concrete provided that the
structure is stabile. This type of weir is recommended for flow with
high velocity and on permeable foundations.
51
Fig. 3.9 Cyclopean Concrete weir
3) Control of Surface Flow factor

(a) Uncontrolled Flow: The incoming flow passes freely to the
downstream apron from the uncontrolled weir. It is used in seasonal
river or on river where regulation is not highly required.
(b) Controlled (Barrage): The whole crest is provided with a gate to
control (regulate) the flow. It is costly structure but efficiently
regulates the flood with low afflux. It is used in seasonal on rivers
where regulation is highly required.
4) Function factor
(a) Storage: Construction for storage purpose. It is termed as low
dam.
(b) Waste Water: Spilling flood excess of pond capacity and is
constructed to safeguard the main weir.
(c) Pickup: Constructed across the river downstream of storage to
raise the level of water released from the storage and divert it for
utilization.
(d) Diversion: Part of a headworks to raise water level in the river and
divert supplies in to the off taking canal.
5) Geometry of Control Section (shape)

(a) Sharp Crested: Thin walled over flow weir.
Fig. 3.10 Sharp Crested weir
52
(b) Broad Crested: Thick walled over flow weir, constructed mostly
on pervious foundation. (Rectangular, Trapezoidal)
Fig. 3.11 Rectangular weir Fig. 3.12 Trapezoidal weir
(c) Ogee Crested: The top and bottom downstream part of weir having
a smooth curve is mostly constructed on a rocky foundation.
Fig.3.13 Ogee Crested weir

In principle, the weir should be constructed on a straight axis
perpendicular to the river flow. However, the weir axis can be
bended according to river and bed rock sediment situation..
Normal case
The weir should be
constructed on a straight
axis perpendicular to the
river flow.
Special case
According to condition of
foundation and landform,
the most economically
axis should be selected.
53
3.1.4 Design Dimensions

The dimensions of headworks such as the design intake level, design
crest height of the weir, height of the sill and span length of the
movable portion of the weir must be decided from consideration of
design conditions. This design conditions are design flood discharge
and in consideration of their effects up and downstream.
(1) Design water intake level

The minimum requirement of the intake level can be calculated
based on the elevation of the fields to be irrigated. Alternatively, as
the function of intake it should satisfy two points: ensuring the
required intake volume and sediment control including flushing of
sediment.
This means after taking the required intake level for the irrigation
area, the intake level should be decided to satisfy both sand
protection and flushing functions. If any hydraulic surplus energy is
expected, then it is better to consider to use such surplus for the
improvement of the functions of the settling basin, diversion or
branching. Adjustment of such hydraulic energy surplus may be
considered by way of drop, etc.
1) Intake level required by irrigation area

The data requirements for deciding the intake level from the
irrigation area perspective comprise the following points:
① Water level at the fields of the highest elevation of the irrigation
area,
② Design maximum intake discharge for the irrigation area,
③ Water level at the starting point of the headrace,
④ The hydraulic loss between the intake and the starting point of
the headrace,
⑤ Other structural losses at the intake (hydraulic loss of entrance,
hydraulic loss of exit, vertical gap of sill, screen and pier, etc.)
2) Intake level required for sand (sediment)-flushing function

The following points should be taken into consideration to fix the
intake level of sediment flushing:
① From the view of sand protection, the approach velocity should
not scour sediment that particle size greater than 0.3mm. In case
54
of a water intake with weir, it is recommended to design the

average velocity upstream of the weir less than 0.4m/sec,
② An intersection angle of intake streamline with river streamline is
essential for sand protection during flood. Furthermore, the
vertical height of the intake threshold above riverbed should in
general be at least 1/6 of the maximum flood depth,
③ The upstream water level at the weir should be determined so as
to satisfy the water level required to scour out the sediment. In
general, such water level would coincide with the height of the
intake threshold at rapid flow and the design intake level at
sluggish flow,
④ Where a settling basin is required (in most cases, the water
intake is necessary even during flood), the water level difference
to satisfy the function of natural flushing must be decided
accordingly.
The design intake level must be decided after sufficient investigation
of the previous points.

It is necessary to consider both level:
Intake level required by irrigation area,
Intake level required for sand (sediment)-flushing function
(2) Elevation of crest height of weir

The crest height of a weir (top of the gate for movable weir or the top
of fixed weir) can be obtained from the design intake level with
necessary margin. About 10cm is usually given as the margin in
consideration of head loss due to waves, blockage of screens of the
intake and abrasion on the top of a fixed weir.
In case of a combined weir consisting of a movable weir and a fixed
weir, the crest levels of both types must be same or that of the fixed
weir shall be made higher. However, in case of a weir constructed on
a torrent where there is no possibility of erosion of the major bed
caused by the constant overflow of the fixed weir, the crest height of
the fixed portion may be lower than that of the movable portion.
In the case of a combined weir, it may be advantageous and
convenient for weir operation if the crest height of the fixed portion
is lower than that of the movable portion to allow discharge
55
downstream during intake of water. Generally, the riverbed of a fixed

weir is the major bed or similar that tends to be eroded by constant
overflow. However, in the case of a weir installed on a mountain
stream where the bed downstream of the fixed weir is formed of
large-sized gravels etc. the height of the fixed weir is usually made
lower for economy and easier operation to allow constant overflow.
Even in this case, it is necessary to consider some marginal height
for abrasion.

Elevation of crest height of weir:
= Design intake water level + Margin(10cm generally)
(3) Ensuring creep length

When constructing an intake weir on a permeable foundationthe
creep lengths must be ensured to safeguard the weir:
① Provision of creep length is necessary to control the flow
velocity that prevent the destruction of the foundation caused
by the action of seepage flow (i.e. "piping"),
② The creep length control the volume of seepage resulted from
the volume of water leakage as a result of percolation of water
blocked by the weir,.
1) Prevention of pipingWhen running water is blocked by a weir

constructed on permeable foundation, the difference of water head
across the weir (ΔH) can act to move soil of minimum grain size as
the water permeates through the ground. This can create voids in
the ground that leads to the destruction of the foundation. This
action is called piping. To prevent this phenomenon, a safe creep
length must be ensured under the foundation of a weir and along the
back of a retaining wall. The creep length to be ensured must be the
larger of the values calculated by following two methods.
① Bligh's method
L ≧ C･ΔH ････････････････････････････････(F. 3.1)
Where L : length of creep length measured along the foundation
face of the weir (which may differ from the actual
56
percolation path) (m).

C : coefficient which varies depending on the type of the
foundation ground material (Table 3.3)
ΔH: maximum head difference at upstream and downstream
sides (m)
② Lane's method
Lane defined the effect of the horizontal creep length as 1/3 of the
vertical creep length. He has established the weighted creep
length by dividing the total of the vertical and horizontal creep
length by the difference between water heads and defined the
ratio as shown in Table 3.3.
L' ≧ C' ･ ΔH ･･･････････････････････････････(F.3.2)
Where L' : length of weighted creep Length (m),
L' = Σ  v +1/3 Σh
 v : creep length of vertical direction (inclination of more than 45
degrees)
 h : creep length of horizontal direction (inclination below 45
degrees)
C’ : Coefficient which varies by the type of ground (Table 3.3)
ΔH : maximum difference between water heads (m)
ΔH adopts a value of big one among H 1 and H 2 .
57
Fig. 3.14 Creep length

Table 3.3 Coefficient for Bligh's and Lane's method
Bligh's coefficient Lane's coefficient
Foundation
(c) (c')
Silty sand or clay 18 8.5
Finesand 15 7.0
Medium sand - 6.0
Coarse sand 12 5.0
Gravel - 4.0
Coarse Gravel - 3.5
Sandy Gravel 9 -
Cobble stone with Gravel - 3.0
Rocks with Cobble stone and gravel - 2.5
Rocks with gravel and sand 4~6 -
Soft lay - 3.0
Medium clay - 2.0
Heavy clay - 1.8
Hard clay - 1.6
(Average grain size of each foundation is shown in the Table 3.4)
58
Table3.4 Values of permeability coefficient

Classification Clay Silty Silty Fine Medium Coarse Gravel
clay sand sand sand sand
d(mm) 0~0.01 0.01~0.05 0.05~0.10 0.10~0.25 0.25~0.50 0.50~1.0 1.0~5.0
k(cm/sec) 0.000003 0.00045 0.0035 0.015 0.085 0.35 3.0
Note) d: Average grain size in mm
To ensure a creep length longer than L or L' obtained from the

previous two calculations methods a cut off wall is normally
provided. This cut off wall increases the vertical creep length in
addition to the horizontal creep length on the weir structure and a
downstream apron. The vertical creep is not only effective in
controlling seepage but it is alsoeffective in countering uplift.
Therefore, it is recommended to construct a cut off wall from the
upstream end of the weir vertically into the foundation ground. The
lengths of the weir structure and the downstream apron are given, as
explained in Section "Spillway", as the minimum required lengths
from the hydraulic design against the overflow of the weir. Thus, the
required depth of the cut-off wall must be the balance of the required
creep length less the lengths of the weir structure and the
downstream apron. The depth of cut-off wall to be installed at the
upstream end of the weir body depends on the grain sizes of the
subsoil. If coarser than fine gravels, then the required depth would
be equal to the water depth of uprise or more and if finer than coarse
sand, then it should be about 1.5 times the water depth of uprise or
more. Wherever sheet piling is difficult due to the presence of larger
gravels, etc. the minimum length must be ensured by a cut-off
through excavation. If the creep length is not sufficiently ensured
due to difficulty or impracticability, then the required lengths must
be ensured by extending the downstream apron, installation of more
than two cut-off walls in parallel or by taking creep length on the
upstream apron into account. In case of parallel walls, the spacing
between the two walls must be more than the total length of the walls.
If the spacing between the two walls is smaller, then the vertical
creep length must not be taken as twice the height of the walls
installed. The purpose of wall and sheet piling at the downstream
apron end is to protect the weir body from scour. Weep holes must be
59
provided in the wall to reduce the uplift pressure.. These wall and
sheet piles are not included in the creep length. Normally, the
upstream apron is not included in the creep length. However, where
the apron has to be included in the creep length caused by trouble in
driving sheet piles, etc., water stops must be inserted in
construction joint. In addition to this, dowel bars or key have to be
made to withstand uneven settlement. Water stops and similar
mechanism are necessary for construction joints or some other
joints in the downstream apron. The difference in head ΔH is usually
adopts a value of big one among H 1 and H 2 , but consideration should
be given to having some safety margin on rivers where retrogression
is anticipated if possible. The abutment foundations of a weir with
banks or embankments will usually be permeable. Therefore, a safe
creep length must be ensured by way of cut-off walls on the extended
line of the weir axis and on the retaining wall or at the foot of the
upstream retaining wall. In this case, it is necessary to study the
percolation path three-dimensionally. Installation of a cut-off wall in
the direction of the weir axis is to ensure a safe creep length along
the route of A - B - C shown in Fig. 3.14. The foot of the cut-off wall
must be at the same level as that of the cut-off wall installed beneath
the weir body with its top being at the same level as the crest height
of the gate.
On the intake side, the intake structure can form a part of the wall.
If the construction of a wall between A - B is not practical due to the
existence of the embankment, etc., then a cut-off wall between A and
A' is required to ensure the required creep length from A' to C. It is
not recommended to make weep holes below the seepage line of the
downstream side retaining wall within the range of the required
creep length. When the upstream side retaining wall is used for the
cut-off wall, it is better not to provide weep holes below retention
level if within the creep length range.

When constructing an intake weir on a permeable foundation, it is
the most important to consider protection of the destruction of
facilities.
60
(4) Study of possible effect on the river control of upstream

Carrying out hydraulic calculations is necessary to obtain the water
level that will occur upstream of the weir with the design flood
discharge. It confirms the absence of interference with water control
and provide appropriate measures to ensure water control, if
necessary.
1) One of the appropriate measuresis heightening the embankment,

within the range of maximum height of 60 cm (considering
acceptable height) or making the river wider so that design high
discharge can flow under the condition that flap gates stand up. This
height of 60 cm is also adopted as freeboard for wing wall.
2) Upstream backwater calculation

(a) Method by calculation
a) Standard step method
This method is to repeat calculations for each section using the
theory of Bernoulli. It starts from the location of the weir, based on
the profile and cross sectional drawings, divide the upstream river
into numbers of sections with each section generally having a
uniform section andbed gradient and assume respective sections x 1 ,
x 2 , x 3 ,･････ x n .
To obtain the water level of each section, use the known value of the
depth of the weir location, which is equal to the height of the water
blocked by the weir, (h 0 ), as the basis of calculation. By repeating a
'series of calculations, h 1 , h 2 , h 3 , ･････ hn should be established. To
get the water depth at the end of the first section (h1), use formula (F.
3.3), and apply h, as temporarily assumed (h1'). By using trial and
error method, repeat the calculations until h 1 ≈ h 1 ' or h 1 – h 1 '<0.01 m
is obtained. Then, using this h, as the basis, seek the value of h2 in
the same method hereafter, continue the repetition of this method
until h3 .･･ hn are obtained. For establishing a temporary value, it is
convenient to carry out approximate calculations using the methods
developed by Tolkmitt, Rühlmann and Bresse. The curve linking the
calculated water levels of individual sections must be the backwater
curve.
61
Q2  1   
hi  hi 1  hi  Z i  Z i 1  a  2  1 2   1  4 1/ 3  4 / 13 2 n12 Q 2 xi
2g A  
Ai 1  2  Ri Ai 2
Ri 1 Ai 1 
 i
･････････(F. 3.3)
Where
Q : design flood discharge (m 3 /sec)
A i : flow area at ( i ) section (m 2 )
R i : hydraulic mean depth at ( i ) section (m)
n i : roughness coefficient at ( i ) section
x i : distance between sections (m)
z i : distance from the base line of ( i ) section to riverbed (m)
a : correctional coefficient of the velocity head
g : acceleration of gravity (m/sec 2 }
Fig. 3.15 Values at section i
The average roughness coefficient between sections where the

roughness of the wetted perimeter varies in part obtained through
the equivalent roughness coefficient at both ends of up- and
downstream of each section. The average of two equivalent
coefficients at respective sectional ends may be made the average
roughness coefficient for the respective sections. The equivalent
roughness coefficient (n e ) can be obtained with the exponential
formula as follows:
From Manning's formula, V = 1/n ･R 2 / 3 ･ I 1 / 2 ,

2/3
1 
ne   
p1n11.5  p2 n12.5  ･･･  pn n1n.5   ･････････････(F. 3.4)
 p 
Where, p is wetted perimeter
62
p  p1  p2  p3 ･････････  pn
Also, the following approximate formula may be used.
1
ne   p1n1  p2 n2  ･････  pn nn  ･････････････(F. 3.5)
p
Table 3.5 parts, roughness coefficient and wetted perimeter

Roughness Wetted
PART
coefficient perimeter
A B n1 P1
B C n2 P2
C D n3 P3
･･
･･
D E
･･
E F nn Pn
Fig. 3.16 roughness of each wetted perimeter is different
The process of calculating the backwater by step calculation method

is illustrated in the form of flow chart in Fig. 3.17.
63
Fig. 3.17 Flowchart of calculating back water

Calculation of backwater curve helps to design wing wall. The
height of wing wall has to be higher than design flood level. Wing
wall protects overflow and property like house, crop land and it
also protects erosion of the bank.
When there is no property at flood influence area the purpose of
wing wall is only protection of the bank. In this case, height of
wing wall doesn’t have to be equal to design flood level for cost
minimization. Stability has to be checked for all case.
64
3.2 Detail Design

Detail design deals with hydraulic and structural design of intake
weirs, inlets, related structures and operation & maintenance
facilities on the basis of the design criteria and dimensions, which
are set up in the basic design.
3.2.1 Movable Weir

A movable weir is a structure to secure the required water level for
water intake and safe flow of water by means of gate operation. It
ensure safety against the action of flowing water etc. and other
relating external forces. A movable weir consists of a spillway and
scouring sluice functioning to secure the required water level for
water intake and to keep flood water flow smooth. In addition, the
scouring sluice provided in front of the intake has an important role
in preventing sediment inflow into an irrigation canal by timely
removal of the sediment accumulated around intake. Important
factors to determine the functions of the spillway include the sill
elevation and its span. On the other hand, important factors in
terms of functions of the scouring sluice are the sill elevation, flow
per unit width required for removal of sediment, canal slope and
height of guide wall.
(1) Sill elevation of movable weir

In order to fix the sill elevation of a movable weir attention must be
given in principle to the naturally formed riverbed configuration.
One of the problem in providing an intake weir on a river is the
backwater of the weir. However, it is known empirically that there is
supercritical flow domain in a river where the river slope is 1/140 or
steeper. In the supercritical flow domain, backwater does not cause
a serious problem. Also, as a concrete intake weir becomes much
smoother in roughness than that of the river, and construction,
taking into account this change in resistance (roughness effect) on
the flow, permits raising of the weir elevation within a range above
the original riverbed elevation without backwater occurrence. The
fundamental requirements are that neither backwater nor silt
deposit shall be caused by construction of the weir. The following
matters should be taken into account from the design point of view:
① The front configuration of the intake weir should be almost
65
similar in figure to the section of the natural riverbed,

② The sill elevation should be so determined as to prevent
backwater and silt deposit by the roughness effect of the intake
weir.

Moveable weir is expensive in current Ethiopian condtion fixed weir
are preferable.
(2) Spillway by movable weir

The spillway should have a structure to release flood water smoothly
and to prevent the effect of backwater as much as possible and to
maintain the thalweg.
1) Sill elevation
See Section 3.2.1.(1).
2) Width
See paragraph 3.2.7(4).
3) Weir body and apron
In Fig. 3.18, lo should be more than twice the upstream water depth
h 1 at the design flood level in order to have the weir function as a
broad crested weir and to give the roughness effect. Also, the slope
should be taken in parallel with the proposed site slope at the
riverbed.
Fig. 3.18 Explanatory profile of spillway
66
The length  g , out of the length  0 at upstream side of the pier should
be taken about three times the width of the pier and given an adverse
slope of 30/100, the tip of which is penetrated about d 1 = 1.5m into
the natural riverbed. The thickness of upstream apron t u should be
about 1/2~2/3 of the thickness of downstream apron. The length  1
of the downstream weir body from guide frame of gate to the
downstream apron can be obtained by formula (F. 3.6) and the
thickness t by formula (F. 3.7).
１＝0.9C D1 ……….(F. 3.6)
Where  1 : length of downstream apron (m)

D 1 : height from apron surface of downstream end to gate
crest (m)
C : (Bligh's) C (according to Table 3.3)
4 ⊿ H - Hf
T≧ ・ ……….(F. 3.7)
3 γ -1
Where T : thickness at an assumed point (m)

ΔH: Water level difference between the top and bottom
H f : Head loss of seepage to optional point (m)
γ : specific weight of materials of the weir and apron
4/3 : safety factor
ΔH-H f shows the strength of uplift at an optional point, H f =

(ΔH/S)S' where the length of path of percolation is S and the total
length of the path of percolation is S’. It is possible that the
thickness at the downstream end would become extremely small in
accordance with formula (F. 3.7). In this case the minimum
thickness is assumed to be 50cm, which depends upon the
configuration of the river and the headworks are given. The
downstream end should be set at an elevation somewhat lower than
the existing riverbed level to prevent scouring and riverbed
degradation and should be terminated with sheet pile works.
However, it should be noted that the sheet pile works are not for
watertight purpose. As the weir body is absolutely protected from
differential settlement, it is necessary to provide a suitable
foundation work.
67
Fig. 3.19 Diagram for thickness of apron
< Supplementary explanation

This item can be used for both Movable and Fixed weir, if it is
necessary to decrease the design flood level. It should be operated
according to flood.
(3) Scouring sluice

A scouring sluice must be
provided at the intake side. It can
prevent sediment inflow into the
canal as much as possible when
drawing water. Scouring sluice
gate can be removed sediment in a
short time.
1) Sediment inflow
The first requisite for the intake
site is that the river channel, in Picture 3.2 Scouring sluice
other words the thalweg, should
be stable. Sediment inflow to the canal would take place in the
following cases:
① If the intake site is not correctly sited in relation to meandering
of the river,
② If water intake is required even during floods,
③ If the intake is located too close to the riverbed elevation and the
intake flow velocity is large.
To avoid ① mentioned above, fix scouring sluice just downstream of a
concave bank center as a suitable site for a smooth removal of
sediment. Item ② mentioned above is a multipurpose water intake
68
case requiring water intake even during flood such as for water
supply, hydropower, etc. In case of item ③ , when the intake flow
velocity exceeds 40cm/Sec, sediment grain sizes of 0.3mm tend to
move. Hence, it is desirable to dam up water by the intake weir so as
to make the intake flow velocity smaller. It is necessary to study the
relationship with construction cost including provision of a settling
basin.
2) Sediment deposition in front of intake

Sand particles start moving when the force of flowing water exceeds
the limit of tractive force.. As a result the riverbed surface takes
various forms, such as ripples, dunes and plane-bed antidunes. The
most typical one may be considered to be a dune. When the sand
particles of the riverbed move in the form of a dune they make
continuous movement on the riverbed not as single particles but as
a mass. In such a case, much roughness effect by concrete cannot be
expected even with a lower concrete floor provided on the riverbed.
However, with a decrease in flood discharge, the traction effect on
the concrete floor gradually appears although not perfectly. In order
to ensure the complete traction effect, it is best to make the concrete
floor elevation the same as the existing riverbed elevation and to
provide a canal style sluice. In other words, there is a need to
provide the scouring sluice with a canal in front of the intake and
this has been confirmed empirically. However, if the scouring sluice
is provided at a much lower elevation than the existing riverbed,
then sediment will be accumulated there. Consequently, making the
sill elevation lower than the existing riverbed level must be avoided.
However, if a lower sill elevation is unavoidable, then the sill
elevation must be determined so as not to cause deposition through
examination by hydraulic model experiments, etc.
3) Basic concept of hydraulic design for scouring sluice

The basic concept of the hydraulic design for a scouring sluice to be
provided in front of the intake is as follows:
① The flow for removing sediment should be supercritical flow,
② The scouring sluice should have the capacity to remove sediment
distributed around the site of headworks at rapid stream river,
③ The elevation of the scouring sluice must be determined in
69
principle at about the same as the water course elevation of the

existing riverbed,
④ In general the slope of the scouring sluice should be constant,
but the slope in the downstream portion could be larger
depending on the riverbed slope and the water level downstream,
⑤ In the case of rapid stream river (River slope ≥ 1/800), Standard
flow quantity of sand washout is the river discharge at the
movement limit of the average grain size (60 percent passing by
weight). In the case of slow stream river (River slope < 1/800),
Standard flow quantity of sand washout is the average discharge
Qm during the irrigation period for gentle streams.
It is necessary that the removal of sediment is performed in a short
time in case of ① . The supercritical flow must be straight and plane.
For ③ , the water course elevation must be carefully examined for
implementation of the river improvement.
4) Method of hydraulic design of scouring sluice for rapid streams

(a) Design of scouring sluice intake
In the condition that the flow within the scouring sluice should be
supercritical, the critical flow will be caused at the intake. And the
design should be made to transport the maximum size particles of
the riverbed materials with this critical flow. The critical velocity
required to transport sediment (Vc) can be given by the, formula (F.
3.7) experimentally. The critical water depth (hc) and the flow per
unit width (qe) can be given by the formula (F. 3.8) and (F. 3.9),
respectively.
Ve ＝ 20 ｄ e ………..(F. 3.7)
ｈ c＝20de　 /g ………..(F. 3.8)
qe＝（20ｄ e）3 /g 2 ………..(F. 3.9)
Where de : maximum grain size of riverbed material

(90 percent passing by weight) (m)
g : acceleration of gravity (m/sec 2 )
Ve: critical velocity (m/sec)
hc: critical water depth (m)
qe: critical flow per unit width (m 3 /sec/m)
70
The height of the guide wall H required to form a channel for the
scouring sluice is made 1.5hc at the point of intake (Fig. 3.20).
Fig. 3.20 Explanatory profile for upstream canal of scouring sluice
(b) Design of upstream portion of scouring sluice

The length of upstream scouring sluice  1 , in Fig. 3.20 can be
obtained from the formula (F. 3.10).
 1 = S ++1.5 Hs ………………………..(F. 3.10)
Where   : width of intake (m),

S : space between upstream end of scouring sluice and
downstream end of intake (m)
Hs : difference between elevation of the bottom of channel
for scouring sluice and design intake level (m)
The elevation at point A of the inflow of the scouring sluice in

principle should be almost the same as the existing riverbed
elevation. The inverting slope of 30/100 should be given to upstream
from point A in penetrating into the depth of about 1.5m from the
surface of the riverbed. The condition in the canal must be given to
a slope i so as to secure the supercritical flow closer to the critical
flow between sections I - II, although depending upon the
downstream water level. The value i can be obtained by the following
formula (F. 3.11):
71
1  h
3  n 2 ghc 3
i h  c 2  1.5hc   10 / 3 …………(F. 3.11)
1  2h  h
 m
The second term of the right side of the formula (F. 3.11) represents
the energy gradient I e required for traction of the deposited sediment
within the canal of the scouring sluice. The value I e should be larger
by the energy loss to transport a volume of sediment than the critical
flow I e corresponding to the hc in the formula (F. 3.12). On the other
hand, I e at the fixed floor will be smaller than the energy gradient I tg
for the critical traction against the average grain size. Where, I e from
the Manning's formula of the average flow and I tg from the simplified
formula by Iwagaki can be given in the formulae (F. 3.12) and (F.
3.13) respectively.
Ie = n 2 g / hc 1 / 3 ………………………… (F. 3.12)
Itg = 8.25 × 10 - 2 d m /h m ……………… (F. 3.13)
Consequently, as the scope of condition to represent item 2 of the

formula (F. 3.11) as the formula of (F. 3.14), i can be obtained by the
formula (F. 3.11).
3
n 2 g  hc
Ie  10 / 3
 I tg ………..(F. 3.14)
hm
where n : Manning's roughness coefficient
hc : critical water depth at the intake of the scouring sluice (m)
which can be obtained by the formula (F. 3.8)
h : depth of the section (at guide frame of the gate) on the
downstream side of the canal (m)
hm : ( hc + h )/2 (m)
dm : average grain size of riverbed materials (m)
The water depth of downstream side h should be equal to the

maximum grain size d 1 or larger of the riverbed materials. If the
water depth is too small, the top of the gravel to be traced would be
exposed above the water, and thus the tractive force will be reduced.
The n value that determines Ie can be in a range of 0.017~0.018.
However, the water depth of downstream side h should be studied
under the condition as n = 0.015 in i obtained by using the formula
(F. 3.11) to confirm that h ≧ d 1 is established and finally the slope
72
of the upstream side of the scouring sluice should be determined.

The slope i is commonly about 1/100.
(c) Design of downstream portion of scouring sluice

For the downstream portion of the scouring sluice, the length  2 in
Fig. 3.21 should be about 1.5 times of the channel width. Also the
length from upstream to downstream end of channel should be
designed about 4.5 - 6 times of the design 'water depth h 3 of the
downstream side as flushing (assuming that h 3 '≈h 3 ) must be C and
the channel bed between CD must be level. The length e 3 is the
distance of the hydraulic jump when the water depth h 3 at the
downstream side is at a conjugate water depth. The slope i 2 between
B and C can be determined so as to conjugate the water depth h 2 and
the downstream water depth h 3 . In other words, the design should be
made to satisfy the formula (F. 3.15).
h 
i 2  2  h  x ≒ h 3   2     1  8 F 2  1  ……………(F. 3.15)
2
 2   
Where i 2 and  2 are given by the energy formula and continuity

formula and Manning’s velocity formula (F. 3.16).
 q  1
2
1   2 2
i 2  2    h  h 2   e  2  2   n qe  2
10 / 3 …………(F. 3.16)
 2 g  h h2 
   h  h 2 
 
 2 
Where h : water depth at the section II (m)

x : difference between downstream water level and water level
of depth above gate bed (m)
h 2 : water depth at section III (m)
F 2 : Froude number to h 2 , F 2 2 = q e 2 / gh 2 3 ≥ 1.75 2
To obtain i 2 first h 2 is calculated by above formula for F 2 . Assumed

F 2 = 1.75 and calculation is carried out by the formula (F. 3.16),
which is necessary to satisfy i 2 ≧ i (slope upstream from point B).
The length of the guide wall on the downstream side is defined as the
distance to the downstream end of the channel. The minimum height
is downstream water level plus 0.50m in sand flushing while the
maximum is the water level of the critical water depth hci at the
73
scouring sluice gate base when the gate is opened to the full width at
the intake water level.
5) Hydraulic design of scouring sluice for moderate stream

For a moderate stream, the grains size of the riverbed materials is
small and the slope is extremely lenient. Small sand particles tend to
move by small force of water and because of the lenient riverbed
slope it also means' that the difference in energy between upstream
and downstream is too small to take the required slope. Hence, the
design should be based on supercritical inflow the scouring sluice.
Fig. 3.21 Explanatory profile of scouring sluice
In Fig. 3.22, the canal base hydraulic head y to maintain

supercritical flow can be obtained by the formula (F. 3.17).
3
v 2 n 2 ghc 
y  h  1.5hc   10 / 3 ………….(F. 3.17)
2g hm
Where h m = ( hc + h )/2,
qc = V･h (flow per unit width)
h c = ( qc 2 / g ) 1 / 3
i = y/ 
Although it is desirable to make the Froude number more than 1.75

for the water depth h in the formula (F. 3.17), assuming to be 1.75
74
temporarily h ÷ -0.5h, and V = 1.75 gh can be established. In other
words, by giving values hs, n and  the value y can be obtained. In

case of the moderate stream, the storage volume upstream of the
weir is generally large. It can be considered to flush sediment by
means of the gate operation with the storage energy utilized.
Consequently, when the width of the scouring sluice is so small that
it is treated as a dead cross sectional area of the river, it is necessary
to examine thoroughly the possibility of the storage energy to satisfy
the formula (F. 3.17). When the storage energy is a prerequisite, the
upstream guide wall must be made higher than the intake water level.
The yardstick of the hydraulic condition that does not affect the
intake function by this method is the width of the scouring sluice is
larger than the width of the intake.
hm 1 0 / 3
Fig. 3.22 Profile of scouring sluice in sluggish stream
6) The width of scouring sluice

The unit discharge qe (rapid stream river : River slope ≥ 1/800) or qc
(slow stream river : River slope < 1/800), should be determined first
by formula (F. 3.17), and then the river discharge Qs at the
movement limit of the average grain size (60 percent passing by
weight) and the average discharge Q m during the irrigation period for
moderate streams. In other words, assuming that the width of the
scouring sluice is B s and B m for rapid stream and moderate stream,
respectively, the width can be given by the following formula:
Bs ≦ Qs / qe ……….(F. 3.18)
Bm ≦ Qm / qc ……….(F. 3.19)
It is desirable to make the width less than 1/2 of its length.
75
7) Data required for designing

① Flood levels in the past and their probability,
② Seasonal river discharge fluctuation,
③ Water level-dischargecurve (H - Q curve),
④ Grain size (90% size and average size),
⑤ Downstream water level in sand flushing,
⑥ River slope.
[Reference 1]
The river discharge at the transportation limit of average grain size;
first the water depth of the average grain size transportation limit
must be obtained by the formula (F. 3.20).
h s c = U * c 2 / g i ………….(F. 3.20)
Where U*c is friction velocity at the limit of the average grain size
transportation, and can be obtained by Iwagaki's simplified formula:
U * c 2 =80.9 dm dm ≧ 0.303cm …………(F. 3.21)
Where dm : average grain size of riverbed (m)
Next, in the H-Q curve obtained from h = (q 2 /gF 2 ) 1 / 3 the value q

where h = h sc is the discharge per unit width for the limit of average
grain size transportation. The approximate value of the river
discharge can be obtained by multiplying discharge per unit width
value by the width of the target river.
[Reference 2]
Example of calculation of scouring sluice canal for a rapid stream;
(i) Design conditions
River width B = 250m, river slope i = 1/300, average grain size of the
river dm = 0.05m, maximum grain size (grain size of 90% passing by
weight) d 1 = 0.30m, ordinary river discharge Q = 130~170m 3 /sec,
water level of downstream of the weir at the ordinary water level EL
= 34.00m, length of scouring sluice canal at the upstream side of the
weir = 40m (planned), original riverbed elevation at the inlet of
scouring sluice EL = 34.00~34.50m and length of the channel for the
scouring sluice at the downstream side of the weir = 20m (planned).
The flood discharge of the river is 4.0 m 3 /sec.
76
(ii) Assumption of the river discharge at the limit of average grain

size transportation.
The Froude number Fr can be approximately calculated by the
formula below:
0 .933 3 .5
Fr  9 . 82  i   300  i   0.67 …………..(F. 3.22)
   
The friction velocity at the limit of average grain size transportation
U * c 2 = 80.9dm = 404.5 (cm/sec) 2 (Iwagaki's simplified formula)
The water depth at the limit of average grain size transportation

h s c = U * c 2 / gi =124cm
Estimation of water depth hs and roughness coefficient n for

discharge per unit width:
h 3 =( q 2 / gFr 2 ) 1 / 3 ……………………… (F. 3.23)
n = h 3 5 / 3 i 1 / 2 /q ………………………… (F. 3.24)
Figure 3.23 shows the results of h 3 , n and q estimation in a graphic

form.
From the graph it can be seen that the discharge per unit width at
the limit of the average grain size transportation q and the
roughness coefficient n, are q = 2.9m 3 /sec and n = 0.0285,
respectively.
Assuming that the river width is 250m, the river discharge at the
limit of average grain size transportation can be estimated at
725m 3 /sec.
77
Fig. 3.23 Water depth and roughness coefficient for unit width discharge
(iii) Study of sand flushing capacity at the inlet of scouring sluice

and channel width
The limit water depth hc and discharge per unit width qe at the inlet
of flood sluice, are
hc = 20 d l/ g, qe = 20 dl 3 / g 2
By substituting dl=0.30m and g=9.8m/sec 2 for the above formula, hc
= 0.612m, qe = 1.5m 3 /sec/m can be obtained. The height of the
guide wall is H= 1.5 hc = 0.918m. And the correction is made
intaking into account the execution and safety factor, as follows:
H=10m, he=0.666m, qc= ghc 3 = 1.7m 3 /sec/m
It becomes necessary that the channel width of scouring sluice

should be made smaller than 100m and 426m, respectively, under
ordinary discharge of the river 170m 3 /sec and the discharge
725m 3 /sec at the limit of the average grain size transportation. It is
understood that designing can be made within 20m (B≧ 20m). When
the width is smaller than a half of its Length, from the viewpoint of
sand flushing function of the scouring sluice, the direction of the
flow can be controlled more easily. From this viewpoint, it is
desirable to make the width of scouring sluice about 20m in the
example.
78
(iv) Design of upstream slope of gate

The condition for determining the slope of a supercritical flow canal
can be obtained by the formula (F. 3.12), (F. 3.13) and (F. 3.14).
n2 g n 2 ghc 3 8.25 102 d m

1/ 3
 10 / 3

hc hm hm
Where hm = (hc + h)/2, dm = 0.05m, hc = 0.666m. In assuming the

water depth at the downstream end of the supercritical flow canal h
and the n value of the canal, Table 3.6 can be obtained.
Table 3.6 Relationship between Roughness Coefficient and Water Depth (n-h)
h 8.25×10 - 2 d m n 2 gh c 2 / h m 1 0 / 3
hm >
(m) hm n=0.017 n=0.018 n=0.020
0.60 0.633 1/153 1/262 1/229 1/189
0.55 0.608 1/147 1/228 1/204 1/165
0.50 0.583 1/141 1/199 1/177 1/144
0.45 0.558 1/135 1/172 1/153 1/124
0.40 0.533 1/129 1/147 1/131 1/107
0.30 0.508 1/123 1/125 1/112 1/91
0.35 0.483 1/117 1/160 1/95 1/77
In Table 3.6, the water depth at the downstream end of the scouring
sluice channel h becomes h = 0.40m to give a value of grain size
larger than that with maximum grain size in the sediment to be
flushed, taking into account the energy loss due to sediment
transportation and the roughness coefficient n = 0.018.
Consequently, the length of channel  1 is  1 = 40m and the slope of
the channel bed is obtained from the formula below:
1  hc 3  n 2 gh 3
 c
i  h   1.5h c   10 / 3  0.01562  1 / 64
1  2h 2  h
  m
Also, the critical slope becomes
ic = n 2 g / hc 1 / 3 = 1/275
thoroughly satisfying the supercritical flow conditions.
The downstream end of the supercritical flow or the gate base
elevation is as follows;
i ×  1 = 40/64 = 0.625m
∴ 34.00-0.625 = 33.375m
(where the inlet base elevation = 34.00m.)
79
(v) Design of scouring sluice channel at the downstream side of the

gate
The condition for the supercritical flow canal with the required
tractive force can be shown as follows.
h2  2 
i2  2  h  x ≦   1  8 F2  1  ……….(F. 3.25)
2 
Here, the difference in elevation between water level on the gate sill
and that of the downstream.
The water level on the gate sill is
33.375 + 0.40 = 33.775m
∴ x = 34.00 - 33.775 = 0.225m
where the length of downstream channel  2 is made  2 = 20m, and the
channel slope i 2 with the required tractive force can be obtained
from the formula shown below in assuming the water depth at the
end of the channel h 2 ;
 2
 1  2
n 2 qe  2
  1
qe
i 2  2  h  h2   　
10 / 3 ……….(F. 3.26)
2g  h2 h 2 
  2    h  h2 
 
 2 
where qe = 1.7m 3 /sec/m, n = 0.018, F 2 2 = q e 2 / gh 2 3 , h = 0.40m
From a trial calculations 2 - 3, the condition is satisfied where h 2

=0.45m. The slope of channel base i 2 becomes i 2 = 1/71.2. However,
since i 2 <i 1 , i 2 is made i 2 = i, i.e. is = 1/64. The height of the
downstream guide wall H 2 , when the sedimentation is deemed to
occur at downstream of the weir, can be obtained from the following
formula: Provided that H 2 is based on the gate sill as a datum level.
H 2 = {(design intake water level)

- (gate sill elevation)} × 2/3 ……………………………(F. 3.27)
This H 2 is the value that becomes about the critical water level on
the gate sill when the upstream water level is at the design intake
water level.
80
(4) Pier
The pier is structure that the gate operation in opening and closing
can be easy,stable mechanically and the obstacles due to the flood
flow can be minimized.
1) Height of pier
The height of pier is determined by the method shown below.
(a) Hoisting gate type

The top elevation of a pier is determined by the following formula.
Top elevation = design flood water level + freeboard① + gate height+

freeboard② + thickness of plate
Where, design flood water level = design flood water level at the
upstream side of the weir
Freeboard① = distance between design flood water level and
gate sill, which must be larger than approach
velocity head in flood,
Freeboard② = distance between gate crest and the bottom of
crest plate. When the gate includes such
structures, as spoiler, screen, stopping hook, etc.
and freeboard of hoist. Generally, about 0.50 -
1.00m will suffice.
Fig. 3.24 Explanatory profile for crest elevation of pier
81
(b) Flap gate weir

The crest elevation of a buttress or pier is determined by the
following formula:
Crest elevation = gate crest elevation + freeboard ③
Where freeboard ③ = height required for operation of the gate and
installation of the sill plate, which is generally 0.50 - 1.00m.
2) Thickness and length of pier

The thickness and length of pier is determined as to minimize
obstruction to the discharge of floods and to secure mechanical
stability for various conditions of gate operation.
River
t p :Thickness
: Length
Fig. 3. 25 Thickness and length of pier
(a) Thickness
Generally, 1.50~3.00m thickness is sufficient. The thickness is first
estimated prior to designing by the empirical formula (F. 3.28) in
taking the height and span length of the pier as parameters based on
the empirical data and determined after examining the stress, etc.
t p = 0.12( D p + 0.2 B i )±0.25m ……………………… (F. 3.28)
Where t p = thickness of pier (m)
D p = height of pier (m)
B i = span length (m)
It is desirable that the blockage factor of the pier against the flow
(the ratio of the total of the thickness of the pier into the water
surface width at the design flood water level) should be smaller than
10%.
(b) Length
The length of a pier in the direction of the thalweg should provide
sufficient stability for the pier. A trapezoidal section is generally
advantageous for the bottom part of the pier. A rectangular section
can be adopted for a pier if used also as large scale bridge piers for
82
case of concrete construction and other construction works. If a

trapezoidal section is used, then the upstream side should be made
vertical with a slope of about 1:0.4 on the downstream side.
(c) Others
In determining the thickness and length of the pier, it is necessary
for the engineer to consider the harmony of the whole structure in
regard to height, spacing, bridge, etc.
3) Shape of cutwater and section

(a) Height of cutwater
Generally, the cutwater should have a freeboard of 0.30 - 0.50m
above the design flood water level on the upstream side. When
cutwater is used as scaffolding for inspection, maintenance, repair,
etc. of the gate, the height should be determined taking into account
the height required for such use. When a bridge is constructed above
the downstream side the height of the bottom of the girder is made
larger than the space required by the structural ordinance (the same
height as the bottom of the lift gate). If no bridge is constructed, then
a height of about 0.30 - 0.50m from the design flood water level of
downstream is enough.
(b) Arrangement
The arrangement in horizontal section of a pier below the cutwater is
semicircular or a spindle shape toward both the upstream and
downstream sides of the pier so as not to cause a vertical inflow time
of flood. If debris flow is violent in flooding, then the design of the
upstream side must be semicircular. In such a case, it is best to take
measures such as installing an iron plate to protect the pier from
wear or providing vacuum treatment, etc.
Fig. 3.26 Example of pier with hoisting type gate
83
4) Safety analysis
(a) A pier must satisfy the following stability conditions:
① If the gate is opened during flood, then it is stable against
action of wind load from both upstream and downstream,
② If the gate is closed at the low flow, then it is stable of both
upstream and downstream side against seismic forces in the
direction of downstream. In other words, when the hydrostatic
pressure and the dynamic water pressure due to earthquake
are acting on the entire height of the gate on upstream side
and the water pressure at the lowest water level on
downstream side (normally 0),
③ If the dam is empty, then it is stable from both upstream and
downstream against the actions of earthquake in the direction
of upstream,
④ If the dam is empty, then it is stable in the direction of the axis
of the weir against actions of earthquake in the direction of
the axis of the weir,
⑤ If the gate is opened in wet season, then it is stable in the
direction of the axis of the weir against actions of earthquake
in the direction of the axis of the weir,
⑥ Stability against the internal stress of each components of
the pier.
(b) Pier stability

a) Design conditions
(i) Unit weight of concrete
Reinforced concrete W 1 = 2.5 (t/m 3 ), plain concrete W 1 = 2. 5
(t/m 3 ),
(ii) The seismic force acting upon the pier is expressed in the
value of the weight of the pier multiplied by the design seismic
coefficient and is considered to act horizontally. In Japan, the
design seismic coefficient is set at K = 0.2 (severe earthquake
area) and 0.1 (light earthquake area),
(iii) Allowable compressive stress of concrete is set at σ c a ≦ σ c k /3,
σ c a ≦ σ c k /4≦ 55(kg/cm 2 ) can be taken in case of plain concrete.
where, σ c k : design compressive stress of concrete,
(iv) Allowable shear stress of concrete must be smaller than the
values shown in Table 3.7
84
Table 3.7 Allowable shear stress intensity (Kg/cm 2 )

Design compressive stress
intensity
σ ck (kg/cm 2 )
180 240 300 400 or over
Without calculation of Beam 6 7 8 9
diagonal tension bar , τ a1 Slab 8 9 9 11
With calculation of Shear stress 17 20 22 22
diagonal tension bar, τ a2 only*
* : In case of considering effect of torsion, it is permitted to increase
these values.
(v) Allowable tensile stress of reinforcing bars by
σ s a (SD30) = 1,800 (kg/cm 2 ), σ s a (SD35) = 2,000 (kg/cm 2 ) use
the following values when the bars are subjected to repeated
loads: σ s a (SD30) = 1,600 (kg/cm 2 ), (SD35) = 1,800 (kg/cm 2 )
(vi) Bond stress of reinforcing bars must be smaller than the

values shown in Table 3.8.
Table 3.8 Allowable bond stress, σ o a (Kg/cm 2 )

Design compressive stress intensity, σ ck (kg/cm 2 )
180 240 300 400 or more
Round bar 7 8 9 10
Deformed bar 14 16 18 20
(vii) Coefficient of uplift

When the pier is founded on rock or the foundation is
surrounded by sheet piles that have reached an
impermeable stratum μ=0.4 or in other cases than the
previous μ=1.0
(viii) Dynamic water pressure strength
7
pd  ・ w0・ kh H・ h ………..(F. 3.29)
8
Where w o : unit weight of water (t/m 2 )
Kh : design seismic coefficient
85
0.2 (severe earthquake zone area),

0.15 (weak earthquake zone: Ethiopia)
H : total head, but in this case, total height of the gate (m)
h : optional water depth from top of the gate to movable section
base (m)
Resultant force of dynamic water pressure
7
Pd 1  ・ w0・ k h・ Bm・ H 2 ………(F. 3.30)
12
Acting point of the resultant force of dynamic water pressure
Y d = (2/5)・H ………(F. 3.31)
b) Type and acting point of external force
(i) Dead weight
W= w ･V
Where w : unit weight (t/m 3 ), refer to Design conditions in
section (b) a) (i) above for concrete
V: volume of the pier (m 3 )
(ii) Weight of hoist W 1 : to be separately calculated.
(iii) Weight of operating bridge W2, : to be separately
calculated,
(iv) Weight of the gate W 3 : to be separately calculated,
(v) Water pressure acting on the gate
1
 2

Pg  ・ w0 H 2  H 0 ・ B m ………(F. 3.32),
2
(vi) Dynamic water pressure acting on the gate
Pd 1  Pd・ Bm ........... (F. 3.33),

(vii) Water pressure working on the pier
1
 2

Pg  ・ w0 H 2  H 0 ・ tp ........... (F. 3.34),
2
Where tp : thickness of the buttress(m)
(viii)Earth pressure due to Sediment
1 2
Pe  C0 γeH e  ( Bm  tp) .......... (F. 3.35),
2
Where C o : coefficient of earth pressure = 0.4~0.5
γ e : unit weight of deposited silt in water (t/m 3 )
H e : height of deposited silt (m)
86
Fig. 3.27 Water pressure received by gate Fig. 3.28 External force and arm
length
(ix) Wind load
The wind load is assumed to be acting on the net projection
area of body and the value is multiplied by the form factor
of the following:
for vertical projection: area 300 (kg/m 2 )
where form factor is made as follows:

for plane form : 1.2
for truss form, on the wind ward : 1.6
for truss form, on the leeward : 1.2
for cylindrical form (one piece) : 0.7
(xi) Horizontal forces due to earthquake, KW, KW 1 , KW 2 , KW 3
(xii) Uplift
1
U ( H  Ho)・ μ・ｗ o・ A ……………(F. 3.36)
2
Where μ : uplift coefficient
A : bottom area of the pier (m 2 )
However, in the case where the uplift remains at the end of the pier,
p is calculated as a trapezoidal section. The X-X' axis of datum line
87
is given to 'the pier section and shows the acting points, of external
force as X and Y, respectively. This distance is called the acting point
distance and obtain Y value for horizontal force and X value for
vertical force.
c) Stability analysis
Moment is calculated from the above external forces and the acting
point distance as well as internal stress and the following items are
examined:
① Safety against overturning
② Safety against sliding
③ Safety against settlement
④ The stress of each member within the allowable stress
First, the resultant force is obtained from the formula below:
 （ V ・ X ）
Xo ＝ …………(F. 3.37)
 V
 （Ｈ・ Y ）
Yo ＝
 H …………(F. 3.38)
∑M＝∑（V・Ｘ）＋∑（H・Ｙ）………….(F. 3.39)
Where
Xｏ : distance between acting line of resultant force of vertical force and
datum point (m)
Yｏ : distance between acting line of resultant force of horizontal force
and datum point (m)
ΣV: resultant force of vertical force (t)
ΣH : resultant force of horizontal force (t)
Σ ( V ･ X ) : total of the moments due to vertical force (t･m)
Σ ( H･Y ) : total of the moments due to horizontal force (t･m)
ΣM : total of moments or the moment due to resultant force (t･m)
(i) Analysis on overturning

In the case where the pier is of plain concrete, it will be safe as long
as the acting point of the resultant force against bottom surface is
within 113 of the center. It is necessary that the eccentric distance
obtained from the formula (F. 3.40) satisfies the condition of the
formula (F. 3.41).
88
M L
e　－ ……….(F. 3.40)
V 2
L
e　　≦ ……….(F. 3.41)
6
Where
e= eccentric distance (m)
L: length of the base (m)
If the pier is of reinforced concrete, the condition of the formula (F.

3.42) must be satisfied at each support.
ΣM r > ΣM t ……………………………..(F. 3.42)
Where
ΣM r : total of the resisting moments against overturning (t･m)
ΣM t : total of the moments against overturning (t･m)
(ii) Analysis on sliding

If the foundation is of concrete, the shear stress τ m ax acting on a
construction joint face is obtained from the formula (F. 3.43).
It is safe as long as the value obtained is within the allowable shear
stress of concrete.
3 H
τmax＝・ ………..(F. 3.43)
2 A
Where
τ ma x : maximum shear stress (t/m 2 )
A : bottom area(m 2 )
This is sufficiently safe if the foundation is on bedrock or gravel, but
the condition of the formula (F. 3.44) must be satisfied against
sliding.
α・∑V＞∑H…………(F. 3.44)
Where α : coefficient of friction against ground
(iii) Analysis on settlement

The compressive strength at the bottom is obtained from the formula
(F. 3.45) and it is normally safe as long as the value is within the safe
bearing capacity of the foundation ground or foundation concrete.
V  6e 
ｐ＝ 1   …………(F. 3.45)
A  L
89
Where p : compressive strength caused at both ends of the bottom

(t/m 2 )
(iv) Analysis of stress of each member

The stress intensities of concrete, reinforcing bars, etc. that
constitute the pier are obtained, and then it is confirmed that
respective values obtained are within the allowable stress. With
regard to the overturning analysis (i), although no problem is
involved in the directions of upstream and downstream, there may
be a case where the above condition cannot be satisfied in the
direction of the weir axis due to the constricted width of the pier as
the width of it may be determined to some extent not to constitute an
obstacle at the time of flood. In such a case, the footing must be
designed to keep the vector of the resultant forces within the base,
and the tensile or compressive forces in the reinforcing bars used in
both sides of the pier within the range of the allowable stress, if the
vector of the resultant force cannot be kept within the middle third
of the base. According to actual cases, the diameters of reinforcing
bars in many cases are φ16 - 25mm for main bars and φ13 - 16mm
for distribution bars. It is best to determine the spacing at about 10
- 30cm generally for main bars. Types of reinforcing bars used
mainly are SD-30 or SD-35 according to actual cases, but it is
desirable to select them based on a thorough investigation of
production quantities, prices, etc.

This stability item can be used for not only movable weir but also
fixed weir.
90
3.2.2 Fixed Weir

A fixed weir is a structure to secure the required water level at the
time of intake, to avoid a considerable obstacle to floods and to have
a section that is safe enough against external forces and is
advantageous from the hydraulic point of view.
(1) Section shape

The sectional shape of a fixed weir body is usually trapezoidal, being
vertical or close to vertical on the upstream face and with a gentle
slope on the downstream face, giving some width on the weir crest.
Where there is a flow of stones, it may be desirable to make the slope
of the upstream face gentle and that on the downstream face steep as
in case of a debris barrier so as to protect the weir body from damage
due to falling stones. It may also be considered that for the purpose
of hydraulic energy dissipation the overflow water is allowed to drop
vertically to the apron without providing deflector blocks at the toe
of the downstream slope. The basic shape is supposed as the shape
stable dynamically based on height of the fixed weir (h) and water
depth on the crest (H d ). There are Bligh’s formula (F. 3.46, F. 3.48)
and Etcheverry’s formula (F. 3.47) to assume the shape.
1) The top width of weir (supposition of section dimension)

Bligh’s formula ; B = (H d + H a v ) / √γ …………..(F. 3.46)
Etcheverry’s formula ; B = 0.552(√h + √(H d + H a v )) ………..(F. 3.47)
Where B : Top width of weir (m)
H d : Water depth on the crest (m)
H a v :Approach velocity head = V 2 /2g (m/s)
γ : Specific gravity of the material of weir (2.35)
h: Weir height
2) The bottom width of the weir (supposition of section dimension)

Bligh’s formula ; L = (h + H d + H a v ) / √γ …………..(F. 3.48)
Where L : Bottom width of the weir (m)
These formulas are estimating formula and it has to be considered
these dimension increasing in reference to the conventional results
appropriately.
91
(2) Type of fixed weir

There are two types of fixed weir, one is fixed type the other is
floating type.
1) Fixed type : When the bedrock is not scoured by running water,
the purpose is achieved only with a weir. Therefore, in this case it is
unnecessary to construct apron and riprap. This case is the safest
and the cost of construction is cheap too.
2) Floating type : When the foundation is permeable ground such as
grit and the bedrock that is easy to get scouring, in this case it has
to construct apron and riprap, which is connected with weir to
prevent scoring of downstream of weir and piping for safety.
(3) External forces

The external forces acting on the weir body include dead weight,
hydrostatic pressure, dynamic water pressure, uplift, seismic force,
sedimentation water pressure, etc.
1) Dead weight
In the calculation of the dead weight of the weir body concrete to be
used for stability calculation, it is desirable to determine the specific
gravity by measuring the sizes of aggregates. Generally ,
approximate specific gravities are as follows: reinforced concrete:
2.5 (24.5KN/m 3 ), plain concrete: 2.35 (23KN/m 3 ), and cement
mortar: 2.15 (21KN/m 3 ).
To calculate the dead weight of the weir body, it is convenient to

calculate by dividing the trapezoidal section into triangles and a
rectangle. In Fig. 3.29, the specific gravity of weir should be taken as
γ, the unit weight of water as w 0 , (9.8KN/m 3 ), dead weight of weir
body as W(t), dead weight of each divided portion and respectively as
W 1 (t), W 2 (t), W 3 (t) and n = tanβ, m = tanβ, the dead weight of divided
portions and that of the whole section can be obtained form the
formula (F. 3.49).
92
nDf B1 mDf
W1
W2
W3
Fig. 3.29 Division of weir body
1 1
W1  woγＢ1Dｆ　 W2＝ woγmＤ f
2
W３＝ woγｎＤ f
2
……..(F. 3.49)
2 2
W2＝W1＋Ｗ 2＋Ｗ 3
2) Hydrostatic pressure
① In case of non-overflow weir and a weir that has a movable weir on
its crest
The condition of the largest difference in water level between
upstream and downstream should be employed for analysis i.e. the
water level upstream is assumed to reach the weir crest and the
water level downstream is assumed to be as high as base level.
② In case of an overflow weir
In case of the upstream water depth being h 1 and the downstream
water depth being below the weir crest, calculation must be
performed under those conditions in consideration of the design
flood discharge for an overflow weir. But if the downstream water
level is above the weir by h 2 as it is considered that the flow above
the weir becomes a supercritical inflow the range of h 2 ≦ 2/3h 1 in Fig.
3.30, then the hydrostatic pressures on the upstream face, weir
crest and downstream side are assumed to be as the low pressure
occurs at the weir crest because of the bending of water stream line.
It is assumed that the upstream face ab is under a trapezoidal load
(h 1 + V 1 2 /2g) at b and (h 1 + V 1 2 /2g+Df) at α, the weir crest bc is under
a trapezoidal load h 1 at b and 0 at c and the downstream face cd is
under a hydrostatic pressure 0 at c and (h 2 +Df) at d. However, as the
hydrostatic pressure on the weir crest is unstable, it would be safer
to omit this if the width bc is small and the overflow weir is used in
93
proportion to h 1 .
Fig. 3.30 H ydrostatic pre ssure of Fig. 3.31 H ydrostatic s ubme rge d we ir
complete overflow
Next, if the weir takes the form of a submerged weir when h 2 >2/3 (h 1
+ V 1 2 /2g), then the condition where h 2 = 2/3 (h 1 + V 1 2 /2g) is
dangerous. The section is determined to satisfy stability under
hydrostatic pressure with the above procedure and to make sure
that the stability can be maintained assuming bc and cd may be
subject to hydrostatic pressure in proportion to the water depth,
when the water level becomes the maximum. Fig. 3.31 shows the
hydrostatic pressure in case of a submerged weir.
3) Dynamic water pressure

No particular consideration of dynamic water pressure is required in
dynamic water pressure.
4) Seismic force
The seismic force is assumed to be acting horizontally to the center
of gravity of the weir body. The design seismic coefficient applies
correspondingly to the case of Section 3.2.1-(4) pier. As in the case
of the pier, the seismic force is considered only at the time of the
ordinary water level but not at the time of maximum flood.
Fig. 3.32 Seismic force acts on weir body
94
The seismic force per unit length F is obtained by the formula (F.
3.50)
1
F KW ( B1  B2 ) D f ………….(F. 3.50)
2
Where F : seismic force per unit length (KN/m)
K : design seismic coefficient (0.15)
W : unit weight of weir body (KN/m 3 )
B 1 : crest width(m)
B 2 : weir bottom width (m)
Df : weir height (m)
5) Earth pressure due to sediment

The earth pressure is added to hydrostatic pressure. The depth of
sediment should be determined depending on the condition of the
weir body. It would be safe to assume that the sediment rises to the
crest. The unit weight of sediment is 8.2KN/m 3 in water and
Rankine's earth pressure is used with the coefficient of earth
pressure as 0.4-0.5. The earth pressure pe is:
1
Pe  (W1  wo)CoHe 2 ……….(F. 3.51)
2
Where W 1 : unit weight of deposited silt (18 KN/m 3 )

w 0 : unit weight of water (9.8 KN/m 3 )
C 0 : coefficient of earth pressure ≈ 0.4-0.5
H e : height of deposited silt (in principle it is treated to be
deposited on the crest)
6) Uplift
The trapezoidal load of each water depth multiplied by the coefficient
of uplift is considered to act against the bottom at the upstream and
downstream ends. The coefficient of uplift is μ = 0.4 an rock
foundation case or a case using sheet piles reaching an impermeable
stratum, otherwise μ = 1.0.
In calculation, it is convenient to divide the trapezoid into two and
the uplift on the upstream side is made U 1 and that of the
downstream side U 2 .
95
1
U 1  ・ w0 B2 h1
2
1 ……….(F. 3.52)
U 2  ・ w0 B2 h2
2
The total uplift
U  U1  U 2  ・ w0 B2  h1  h2  ……….(F. 3.53)

1
2
Where w o : unit weight of water (9.8 KN/m 3 )
B 2 : width of bottom of weir body (m)
h 1 , h 2 : water depths of upstream and downstream (m)
μ : uplift coefficient
The uplift of the weir on the permeable ground varies depending on

how the apron is designed. Generally, when the river water level is
equal to the weir crest, the uplift becomes the maximum. But
sometimes the uplift is larger than the difference between the
upstream water level and the downstream water level. Therefore, in
designing the cross section, up- and downstream water elevations
and the worst condition then the largest hydraulic head difference
should be considered.
There are two methods of designing the cross section. One is to
determine the section above the apron floor slab first, followed by
the apron thickness from the uplift, which is added thereto. The
other is to determine the weir body first and front and rear aprons
are added thereto. The most suitable method should be chosen
depending on the method of excavation. If the weir body is to be
constructed first and the apron floor slab later, then the latter must
be selected.
96
Fig. 3.33 Uplift water level Fig. 3.34 The way of taking
water level
(4) Determination of section (Stability analysis)

The section is determined so as to satisfy the following conditions:
For the bottom
① no overturning ② no sliding ③ no settlement
These condition should be considered the case of dynamic (flood),
static (dry) and earthquake.
1) Stability for the overturning

In regard to the overturning, the following conditions must be
satisfied:
e = | ∑ M / ∑V – B 2 / 2 | ≤ B 2 / 6 (Normally),
B 2 / 3 (Earthquake) ……….(F. 3.54 )
Where
ΣV : resultant force of vertical force (KN)
ΣH : resultant force of horizontal force (KN)
e : eccentric distance (m)
To avoid tensile stress in the weir body, the resultant force must
pass within the middle 1/3 of the center of the bottom length as a
limiting stress. Thus the condition against the overturning can be
satisfied.
2) Stability for the sliding

In regard to the sliding, the following conditions must be satisfied:
S L = ∑ M × f / ∑V ≥ 1.5 (Normally),
1.2 (Earthquake) ……….(F. 3.55)
97
Where S L : slide coefficient

f : friction coefficient = 0.7～0.75
However, when it is constructed on bedrock, the shear sliding

resistance is taken with the safety factor (n) of larger than 4. In the
case f = 0.6 is used:
Z B  fV
n　 0 2 ≧ 4.0 ………(F. 3.56)
H
Where Z 0 : shear resistance at the bottom
3) Stability for the settlement (over stress)

In regard to the settlement, the following conditions must be
satisfied:
 V  6e 
q＝ 1   < q a …………(F. 3.57)
B2  B2 
Where q : compressive strength caused at both ends of the

bottom (KN/m 2 )
q a : allowable stress of the graund (KN/ m 2 ) (refer to
table 3.11)
(5) Correction of trapezoidal section

In the case of construction of large scale weir, it is desirable to
modify sectional form of the weir body so that weir body is not
separated from overflow water streamline. In this case, it should be
considered easiness of the construction.
It is desirable to employ quarter perimeter of an oval for upstream
edge line of the weir crest and a quarter circle also can be used .. The
downstream edge of the weir crest employs a parabolic shape and
joins the downstream slope smoothly.
The bucket requires a radius of 1/2 ~ 1/3 of the crest height (D f ) and
must have a tangent line to the downstream apron (Fig. 3.35).
98
1) Edge of upstream weir crest

The edge of the upstream weir crest employs a quarter perimeter of
an oval so that the formula below can be satisfied, where hi + hv = h
a ＝0.125ｈｂ＝0.28ｈ…………(F. 3.58)
Fig. 3.35 Modification of trapezoidal section
2) Downstream face
Although there are various corrected sectional forms for the
downstream face, it is necessary that the overflow water streamline
should not separate from the weir body. For this reason, the
downstream face is shaped as a parabola with x 2 = αhy. The value of
α is made larger than 1.78 and the parabolic line comes in contact
with the downstream face. Therefore, in Fig. 3.35, axes x and y are
taken as shown in the figure and where a point of intersection
between y axis and the slope of downstream is O, and OE = d
The curve formula comes in contact with the downstream face below
the weir crest by d.
x 2 = 4m 2 dy ……………………..(F. 3.59)
The following condition must also be satisfied;
4(d / h)m2  1.78 …..........(F. 3.60)

Where it is required to give a certain width to the weir crest, a
horizontal section may be suitably provided from point E on axis x.
3) Bucket
The bucket is provided to divert the falling water streamline to the
horizontal direction at the toe of the slope of the body of the overflow
weir except for a weir with small flow and constructed on relatively
99
good foundation bedrock. The purpose is to prevent scouring caused

by the falling and crushing of water. Etcheverry defined the curve to
be a radius of 1/2 -1/3 of the weir height. To make the bucket really
effective, it is necessary to make a tangent to the ground and make
the radius of the bucket larger as the weir is higher and the overflow
volume is larger so as not to create a sudden change at the junction
point with the bedrock. Also, the radius may be changed depending
on the quality of the bedrock and it is necessary to provide a system
to prevent scouring downstream of the weir body in case of poor
bedrock or gravel ground.
(6) Apron
1) Downstream apron
To prevent scouring downstream of the weir due to the overflow
water a downstream apron is provided at the downstream face. The
thickness of apron is determined in the same manner as that of the
movable weir.
The length can be obtained from the formula below:
 1  0.6C D1 ............. (F. 3.61)
Where  1 = length of downstream apron (m)

D 1 : height from top surface of downstream end of apron to
weir crest (m)
C : Bligh's C (Table 3.3)
About the thickness of downstream of apron, please refer to 3.2.1 (2)
3).
2) Upstream apron
The apron to be provided upstream is to prevent scouring of the
riverbed by vortical flow caused by the overflow water. Therefore, the
thickness may be thinner than the downstream apron. Normally the
thickness is made about 1/2 - 2/3 of that of the downstream apron,
but on a river where vortical flow may occur, the thickness must be
increased. As with the upstream apron of a movable weir, a reverse
slope of about 30% may also be applied for the upstream apron of a
fixed weir. However, when the weir height (D f ) is more than 2 ~ 3m
and deposited silt at the upstream face is foreseen, It is not needed
to provide. The calculation of creep length should not be taken this
100
into account for safety. Where it is unavoidably taken into account

in the calculation of creep length, reinforcing bars, structural steel,
etc. must be inserted in the joint with the weir body so as to prevent
settlement and a water stop must be used to make the structure
thoroughly watertight.

Apron, if river bed is hard rock, may not be necessary to
construct. When floating type is selected, the unification of apron
and weir for creep length is needed and the reinforcement bar
should be put in bottom slab for protecting the destruction by
uneven subsidence.
Creep length has to be considered with only weir and downstream
apron.
3.2.3 Riprap
Riprap is provided where there is fear that local scouring would be
caused on the riverbed taking into account the condition of the
riverbed and of the flow caused both upstream and downstream, and
of construction that is safe against the flow, and will have an energy
dissipating effect. Riprap is provided continuously on the
downstream apron to prevent the scouring of the riverbed, because it
is apparent that the scouring is caused due to removal of deposited
silt or vortical inflow compensation of the local dissipation of the
water energy.
(1) Basic concept for engineering of riprap work

The fundamental concept for preventing local scour downstream of a
weir is to dissipate the energy of the high velocity flow that passes
the weir body gradually using the resistance of the riprap, making
the flow velocity of the downstream section of the riprap the same as
that of the downstream river following the riprap. The condition of
the flow at that time is given by the hydrological quantity at the time
of the critical movement of the average grain size of the riverbed
material. This is premised on the fact that the flow of sediment in
excess of the critical movement has continuity and the equilibrium
of the riverbed can be maintained.
101
(2) Conditions required for riprap

1) Dissipating effect and prevention of local scouring
The construction of riprap is such that it dissipates the energy of the
high velocity overflow and allows it to flow gently downstream. It
prevents differential settlement due to erosion etc. of riverbed
materials below the riprap and the occurrence of local scouring at
the end of the riprap.
2) Curvature (adaptability to settlement)

The adaptability to settlement is given to riprap so as to adapt it to
changes in the riverbed when the riverbed on the downstream side of
the weir should become lower in the future through retrogression of
the riverbed. It also allows continuity over the whole riprap.
3) Wear resistance
As there can be a large movement of sediment at the time of flood,
the riprap must have wear resistance against the flow of sediment.
4) Flow-through ability of sediment

In the case of a natural river, there is a continuous movement of
sediment. Therefore, the construction of riprap should be such that
the movement of sediment should not be hindered. If the
hydrological construction of riprap is made such that it stops the
movement of sediment abruptly, then the sedimentation would occur
on the weir body being affected by the deposited silt on the riprap
when the weir height is low. In addition, the abrupt dissipation of
energy would result in a destructive force being given to the riprap
itself.
(3) The shape of riprap

1) Riprap of downstream side
Riprap of downstream side is established in consideration of the
following point to an action of a flood.
(a) Riprap of downstream side of headworks is considered
hydraulic phenomenon at the time of a flood (hydraulic jump
and disorder of flow after the jump) and shares with two
sections of downstream riprap A and B,
(b) Riprap A should be made of concrete structure or connected
102
structure of blocks because the flow of this section is

disordered by the high-speed flow,
(c) Riprap B is desirably made of a flexible structure to follow the
unexpected river bed fluctuation of up and downstream.
2) Riprap of upstream side
Riprap of upstream side is installed for prevention of scouring which
formed by eddy current at the direct upper reaches of headworks.
The structure of riprap should be flexible type to follow the river bed
fluctuation. Moreover it is desirable to make a slope in the direction
of upper stream in order to correspond to the degradation of river
bed.
(4) The length of riprap of upstream side

Riprap in the upstream side of headworks has its objective to
prevent the local scouring that forms at the direct upper reaches of
headworks and protect the body and an installation retaining wall in
the riverbank part. According to a hydraulic experiment and the past
case, the local scouring depth formed by water-route of sandbar
formation in an upstream riverbed and the eddy that occurs by a
decline of the upstream riverbed amount bring is around the water
depth. Therefore, it's better to be an upstream side riprap longer
than design flood depth. But, a decline of the upstream side riverbed
will be prime factor of eddy occurrence at the river of narrow width
and that doesn't generate a sandbar. The riprap necessary to a local
scouring measure is about 2 times of length of the decline amount of
the expected upstream riverbed in this case.
(5) The length of riprap A of downstream side

The length of riprap A of downstream should be made the length that
cuts the energy of the running water with energy dissipator surely by
the thing, which makes hydraulic jump occur by riprap. The
phenomenon of hydraulic jump is different in the form depending on
changes in the flow rate, the riverbed slope and the gap. The perfect
hydraulic jump that winds a big vortex gives a large force to riverbed
part. Therefore, a riprap A section should be beyond the length of
perfect hydraulic jump in consideration of hydraulic phenomenon.
In case of rapid river, because hydraulic jumping length become long,
it is possible to install the help structure that had energy dissipator
103
and shares the dynamic water pressure and to reduce a riprap A

section by the thing, which makes hydraulic jump occur
compulsorily.
Apron
L2 L1
Riprap B Riprap A
Fig. 3.36 Riprap
1) Calculation method for fixed weir

The length of riprap A section is calculated by the following formula:
L= L 1 + L 2 …………..(F. 3.62)
Where
L 1 :The hypercritical flow section of from dropping
point of stream to start point of hydraulic jump
L 2 :The section of hydraulic jump occurred
⊿Z
Fig. 3.37 Riprap detail
Hypercritical flow section(L 1 ) and hydraulic jump section(L 2 ) should

be calculated repeatedly by increasing flow discharge from low flow
to design flow while water depth of dropping point(h 1 a ) is lower than
conjugate depth(h 1 b ) of down stream natural depth.
104
In the case of "h 1 a >h 1 b ",because the perfect hydraulic jump changes
to imperfect jump, turbulent of river bed is decreased.
The calculation of riprap A section is made according to the following

procedures.
① Calculation of water depth at the dropping point from
overflowing,
② Calculation of water depth at the beginning point of
hydraulic jump,
③ Comparison with h 1 a and h 1 b
(a) Calculation of water depth at the weir toe

The water depth of weir toe can be calculated by the following
equation about preservation of energy between the section Ⅰ -Ⅱ .
2 2
Vc V
 ⊿Z＋hc＝ 1a  h1a …………..(F. 3.63)
2g 2g
Where V c :Velocity of critical depth (m/sec) = q / h c

g : Acceleration of gravity (m/sec 2 )
h c : critical depth (m) = 3 √(q 2 /g)
h 1 a : water depth at the dropping point from
overflowing(m)
V 1 a : velocity at the weir toe (m/sec)
⊿ Z : height between crest and apron (m)
q: Unit width flood discharge (m 3 /s/m) = Q d / W
Q d : Designed flood discharge (m 3 /s)
W: River width (m)
In the substitution of V 1 a =q/h 1 a for this equation, and assumption

as the polynomial of h 1 a , h 1 a and V 1 a are obtained by the trial and
error calculation.
(b) Calculation of water depth at the beginning point of hydraulic

jump
The water depth at the beginning point of hydraulic
jump(sectionⅢ -Ⅳ ) is obtained by following equation.
105
h1b 1 2
 ( 1  8 F2  1) …………..(F. 3.64)
h2 2
Where
h 1b : water depth at the beginning point of hydraulic jump
h 2 water depth of downstream
F 2 : Froude's number of downstream F2  V2 / gh2
V 2 : Velocity of downstream
(obtained by normal flow calculation)
(c) Comparison with h 1 a and h 1 b

a) In the case of h 1 a = h 1 b
In this case, hydraulic jump occurs from the dropping point from
overflowing. It is assumed that the length of hydraulic jump section
is about 4.5 - 6 times of water depth of downstream, the length of
riprap A is calculated by following formula.
L=L 2 =(4.5～6）×h 2 …………..(F. 3.65)
b) In the case of h 1 a > h 1 b
In this case, it is not necessary to install riprap A because hydraulic
jump is submerged. However, it is better to adopt riprap B rather
longer because it is possible to occur jet flow on the riverbed.
c) In the case of h 1 a < h 1 b

In this case, as the beginning point of hydraulic jump moves to
downstream, it is better to make riprap A longer. Therefore, the
length of riprap A is calculated following formula.
L=L 1 +L 2
L 1 is the length while the water depth h 1 a rises to h 1 b . So the L 1 can
be obtained by the following formula seeking for water surface
profile.
q 2 dh 3
 2
 (h  hc 3 ) …………..(F. 3.66)
C dx
q2 1
 2 x  a  h 4  hc 3h …………..(F. 3.67)
C 4
Where
q : flow per unit width of design flood discharge (m 3 /sec/m)
C: Chezy's formula (=h 1 / 6 /n)
n: Coefficient of roughness of weir (=0.04)
106
x : sectional length
a: constant
When h 1 b is substituted for this equation(h = h 1 b ) after first water
depth h 1 a is substituted for this equation(h = h 1 a, x=0) and constant
"a" is obtained, the sectional length x=L 1 is obtained.
Consequently, necessary length of riprap A is following formula

added up hydraulic jump length.
L=L 1 +L 2 = L 1 +(4.5～6）×h 2 …………..(F. 3.68)
(6) Riprap B of downstream side

Flow distribution of vertical direction after energy dissipator by
hydraulic jump by riprap A becomes uniform mostly. Therefore, the
shearing force is bigger than a downstream riverbed and it becomes
easy to bring about scouring by a riverbed base.
Riprap B must be a buffer structure that has large roughness to
reduce shearing force of riverbed to that of downstream. When the
length of the riprap B section necessary to this rectification is
judged from an existing case, it's proper to make it 3 to 5 times of
design water depth.
The way of thinking to decide about the length of the riprap was
described above, but it's desirable that the specification and
characteristics of the river course by which the width of a rivers are
the riverbed material and the flow rate, etc. Whenever possible make
sure of its validity, do model test about an important structure,
consider these overall and decide a riprap length from a case in the
same river mostly.
(7) Use of Bligh's formula (Reference)

Although Bligh's formula has been used frequently, the flow
resistance due to the flow situation and the riprap itself is not taken
into consideration in the formula. It is scope of construction of the
riprap.
L  LB   a ……..(F. 3.69)
LB  0.67C H a  q  f ……..(F. 3.70)
107
Where
L : length of riprap (m)
L B : total length of protection including length of apron l a
and length of riprap L (m)
H a : height from above water level of downstream side to
weir crest in dry season (m)
q : flow per unit width of design flood discharge (m 3 /sec/m)
f : safety factor, 1.5 in case of movable weir
1.0 in case of fixed weir
C : Bligh's coefficient by type of foundation ground (refer to
Table 3.3)
(8) Structural engineering of riprap

1) Size of riprap block
It is necessary that riprap block resists the flowing force and is
stable. The size of each block is desirable to satisfy the formula
below.
W  3 . 75 AV 2
/ 2 g ……….(F. 3.71)
Where
W : weight of each block (t)
A : area of collision with flowing water (m 2 )
v : velocity at which flowing water collides with (m/sec)
Formerly, the sizes of blocks used in the river works were 2t/blocks
for sluggish stream sloping at less than 1/1000 ; 3t/blocks for
1/1000~1/500 and 4t/blocks for rapid streams more than 1/500.
Unlike a foot protection of river, the size of each block should be
larger than in case of riprap for the headworks.
2) Jointing of blocks and prevention of suction

(a) It is preferable that blocks have the ability of interlocking with
each other and resist against the flow as a whole. Particularity, it is
desirable to secure the ability of interlocking by making use of the
construction of the block itself. The end position of riprap is
desirable to be equal throughout the whole riprap. If an irregular
108
downstream limit of riprap is unavoidable, then it is necessary to

give consideration not to change the length of construction abruptly
or to provide a partition wall, etc. so as not to generate vortical flow
due to whether or not blocks exist to the left or right sides of the
direction of flow.
(b) To prevent erosion of riverbed sediment due to the flowing water,
a suitable construction method must be selected. The danger of
causing erosion is high in the supercritical flow section and the
colliding force of the flowing water is also large. Attention must be
paid to prevent suction and to preventing the blocks from moving.
The usual method of construction considered is to construct the
concrete floor on the riverbed where blocks are installed or a
partition wall in the boundary with the ordinary flow area (Refer to
Fig. 3.38). Also cobble stone fill is provided between the blocks.
Although the measures of preventing erosion of sediment in the
ordinary flow section differ depending on the flow velocity, the
method in which the bed where blocks are installed is left as the
undisturbed riverbed and a filter using cobble stone, etc. is provided
between blocks or the method by which a mat is provided on the bed
where blocks are installed for prevention of erosion are methods to
be considered. There is also method by which a partition wall and
sheet piles are constructed to prevent blocks from moving due to
local scouring and to maintain the function of the riprap for a longer
period.
Fig. 3.38 Flow over riprap

Riprap, if river bed is hard rock, may not be necessary to
construct. Riprap dimensions becomes long expensive when this
design method is used.
109
3.2.4 Foundation Work

Foundations have to support the structural loads, such as a pier,
weir body, etc. The appropriate construction method must be
selected in consideration of the situation of the foundation ground at
the point where the headworks is to be constructed and also the
functions of the superstructure.
(1) Functions of foundation work

The foundations of a weir must transmit the loads of pier, weir body,
etc. safely to the bedrock below or in subsoil stratum having
sufficient bearing capacity. .In addition it reduces the ground water
flow below the weir body owing to difference in water level between
upstream and downstream. It serves as a cut-off wall to secure
required creep length preventing the piping of the gravel layer (refer
to Section 3.2.5). It also functions, as a partition wall (refer to
Section 3.2.5) to prevent scour occurring on the riverbed at the
upstream and downstream ends of the weir body owing to the,
flowing water from reaching the base of the weir body.
Therefore, in the design of the foundation of the headworks, care

must be taken to understand the objective thoroughly, adopt the
construction method that is suitable for the site, make design
chioces be economical and durable, and thoroughly execute said
construction method.
(2) Types of foundation work

Foundation work includes spread foundations, constructed directly
on bedrock or gravel, pile foundations may be bearing loads with
piles resting on a firm layer(end bearing) or by friction piles; and well
foundations and caisson foundations as special foundations.
1) Spread foundations
Although there is no problem when headworks are constructed on
bedrock, footings are required whereby the base of a fixed weir,
abutment and piers are enlarged when the weir is founded directly
on gravel.
The design of footing is performed by the following procedure:
110
① Calculate the load on the base of the footing.

② Obtain the allowable bearing capacity of the supporting
ground.
③ Determine the configuration and sizes of footings so that the
maximum contact pressure acting on the base of the footing
is less than the allowable bearing capacity.
④ Determine the section and arrangement of reinforcing bar for
the footings.
(a) Contact pressure

a)Considering that where the vertical load from the superstructure
acts on the center of the base of the footing, the contact pressure is
distributed uniformly over the entire base area, the following
formula is applied.
P
σα＝ ≧ｑ a ………(F. 3.72)
A
Where, σ α .: contact pressure (KN/m 2 )

P : vertical load acting on footing (including dead load of
footing) (KN)
A : base area of footing (m 2 )
q α : allowable bearing capacity of ground (KN/m 2 )
When an eccentric load acts on the base of the footing as shown in

Fig. 3.39, one end of the footing is lifted up as the eccentricity of the
load exceeds a certain value and the contact pressure at that portion
becomes zero. Assuming that the contact pressure is distributed
linearly, the maximum contact pressure is examined by the formula
(F. 3.73).
αP
σmax＝ ≧ｑ a ……….(F. 3.73)
A
Where, α ma x : maximum contact pressure (KN/m 2 )
α : coefficient determined by eccentricity of load and
configuration of bottom. It is 1 where there is no
eccentricity. Generally, the extent of eccentricity in
an independent footing should be limited to e / L = 1/3.
Fig. 3.45 shows the value of α in the range of
0≦ e / L ≦ 1/3.
111
P : vertical load acting on footing

(including dead load of footing).
A : base area of footing (m 2 )
q α : allowable bearing capacity of ground (KN/m 2 )
Fig. 3.39
Contact pressure distribution
of rectangular foundation
Fig. 3.40
Graph for calculation of α, α’
When an eccentric load and moment act on the base simultaneously

as shown in Fig. 3.41, the equivalent eccentric load indicated by the
broken line is substituted, and using
 MG M＋Pε M
e ＝＝＋ε………..(F. 3.74)
P P P
α is obtained from Fig. 3.40.
If the case where the vertical load is acting on an particular point on

the base of a rectangular footing, the coefficient ߙ when the vertical
resultant force is acting on the shaded portion as shown in Fig. 3.42
(a) can be calculated from the formula below.
6ｅ 6ｅ
α ＝ 1＋ L
＋ B
……….(F. 3.75)
L B
112
Fig. 3.42
Fig. 3.41
Contact pressure distribution
Where eccentric load and
when resultant vertical force
moment work at the
acts on every point of
same time
rectangle bottom
Fig. 3.43 Coefficient of contact pressure when resultant

vertical force acts on every point of rectangular
bottom
When the vertical load is acting on the outside of the shaded portion
as shown in Fig. 3.42 (b), the compressive stress becomes zero at a
part of the base. The value ߙ in this case can be obtained from Fig.
3.43.
113
(b) Allowable Bearing Capacity of ground
To obtain the allowable bearing capacity of the ground there are the
following methods:
① Allowable bearing capacity is determined from the ultimate
bearing capacity formula using the results of soil test.
② Allowable bearing capacity is determined directly from the
results of a plate bearing test.
③ Allowable bearing capacity is determined from the
conventionally adopted table of bearing capacity of ground.
a) Formula to calculate allowable bearing capacity

To calculate the allowable bearing capacity, it is suggested to use the
formula below, which has been developed from Terzaghi's ultimate
bearing capacity formula.
The long-term allowable bearing capacity:
qa 
1
a・ C・ N c   1 ・ B・ N  ＋γ 2・ D f・ N ｑ …(F. 3. 76)
　
3
The short-term allowable bearing capacity:
2 1 
qa  a・ C・ N c   1・ B・ N  ＋ γ 2・ D f・ N ｑ  ………(F. 3.77)
　
3 2 
Where q α : allowable bearing capacity (KN/m 2 )

C : cohesion of ground below foundation load surface (KN/m 2 )
γ 1 : unit weight of ground below foundation load surface
(KN/m 3 ). When it is below ground water level, use the
submerged unit weight.
γ 2 : average unit weight of ground above foundation load
surface (KN/m 3 ). When it is below ground water level, use
the submerged unit weight.
α , β : shape factor (refer to Table 3.9)
N c , N r , N q : coefficient of bearing capacity, which is a function of angle
of internal friction and can be obtained from Table 3.10 or
Fig. 3.45.
D f : depth from deepest ground surface adjacent to foundation
to foundation load surface (m) (refer to Fig. 3.44).
114
B : minimum width of foundation load surface. In case of circular

shape, use diameter (m)
Table 3.9 Form factor

Shape of foundation
plate
Continuous Square Rectangle Circle
Coefficient
Α 0.1 1.3 1+0.3B/L 1.3
Β 0.5 0.4 0.5-0.1B/L 0.3
<Remark> B : Length of short side of rectangle
L : Length of long side of rectangle
The value of cohesion C and angle of internal friction should be

determined by a direct shear test or by a triaxial compression test.
However, as it is difficult to take undisturbed samples from sandy
ground, the value of the angle of internal friction is assumed from
the results of the standard penetration test(SPT), and cohesion is
assumed at C = 0.
Table 3.10 Bearing capacity factor

Φ Nc Nr Nq
0° 5.3 0 3.0
5° 5.3 0 3.4
10° 5.3 0 3.9
15° 6.5 1.2 4.7
20° 7.9 2.0 5.9
25° 9.9 3.3 7.6
28° 11.4 4.4 9.1
32° 20.9 10.6 16.1
36° 42.2 30.5 33.6
40° or more 95.7 114.0 83.2
115
Fig. 3.44 Investigation of contact pressure
Fig. 3.45 Relation between internal friction angle and f

coefficient of bearing capacity
As a formula to infer the angle of internal friction φ of sandy ground

from the N-value of the standard penetration test, Peck proposes the
following formula within the range of N <40:
φ = 0.3N + 27° …………………… (F. 3.78)
116
Dunham gives the following relational expressions in consideration

of particle shape of sand and grain size distribution:
For round particle with uniform grain size:
Φ= 12N +15°………………………(F. 3.79)
For round particle with good grain size distribution:
Φ= 12N +20°………………………(F. 3.80)
For angular particle with uniform grain size:
Φ= 12N +20°………………………(F. 3.81)
For angular particle with good grain size distribution:
Φ= 12N +25°………………………(F. 3.82)
b) In the case the footing is subjected to inclined load and eccentric

load:
When the load is inclined or eccentric, the bearing capacity of the
ground decreases. When the load is inclined as shown in Fig. 3.46
the unit allowable bearing capacity is obtained approximately by
multiplying each term of the formula (F. 3.76) by the correction,
respectively, as follows:
1
qa  　ic a・ C・ N c  ir 1・ B・ N＋iq γ 2・ Df・ Nｑ ……….(F. 3.83)
3
Where i c = i q = (1 - θ /90) 2
i r = (1 - θ /φ) 2
θ : angle of inclination (degree)
φ: angle of internal friction (degree)
Fig. 3.46 Inclined load
117
When the load is eccentric from the center of the footing, there is a
method by which the contact pressure distribution of trapezoidal or
triangular load balanced with the eccentric load is considered as
shown in Fig. 3.42, and designed is such that the maximum contact
pressure σ m a x of the foundation base is within the allowable bearing
capacity (q a ), and another method by which design is performed
assuming that the effective width of the foundation base decreases
by two times the eccentricity. In this guideline, the former method is
used. When the load is inclined or eccentric, design is such that the
maximum contact pressure is within the unit allowable bearing
capacity with inclined load.
c) Method by plate bearing test

Where spread foundation is used, the ground is generally considered
sound, there is generally no need for a plate bearing test to be
performed. However, where the plate bearing test is carried out, the
smallest of the three types of loads, 1/2 of yield load, 1/3 of ultimate
bearing capacity and 1/2 of load when the gross settlement reaches
20mm, is used as the long-term allowable bearing capacity of the
ground.
d) Table of bearing capacity of normal ground (normal bearing

capacity table)
When the outline of ground condition is known and investigation
according to the above is not carried out, the normal bearing
capacity table shown in Table 3.11 can be referred to for the
empirical estimation of the long-term unit bearing capacity of the
ground.
118
Table 3.11 Long-term allowable bearing capacity

Long-term Remarks
Condition of allowable
N value Unconfined
Foundation bearing
compression
plate capacity
strength
(kN/m 2 )
qu (kN/m 2 )
Bedrock 1,000 100 or more
Cemented sand 500 50 or more
Mudstone 300 30 or more
Gravel, dense 600
non-dens 300
Sand, dense. 300 30~50
Medium 200 20~30
100 10~20
loose 50 5~10
Very 0 less than 5
Clay, very hard 200 15~30 250 or more
Hard 100 8~15 100~250
medium 50 4~8 50~100
Soft 20 2~4 25~50
very soft 0 0~2 less than 25
It is possible for short-term allowable bearing capacity to be applied

double value of long-term one.
3.2.5 Upstream and Downstream Cut-off Walls

A cut-off wall must be an impermeable structure with sufficient
depth. A dwarf wall must have enough depth against the anticipated
depth of scour.
(1) Upstream cut-off wall

An upstream cut-off wall is installed for the purposes of prevention
of piping by percolating water, stabilization of headworks and
reduction of percolation. The wall must be located at the upstream
extremity of a weir body and beneath the weir. The wall is required to
be installed at least at the upstream side of the weir body axis so
119
that it can prevent scouring especially by the floods just after the
completion of construction and as a water-seal during construction.
The walls may be extended from the weir body to abutments of the
headworks to complete the seal if it is necessary. In this case, the
wall should be called a water-cut wall or wing wall to distinguish it
from cut-off wall.
Fig. 3.47 Cut-off wall (example)
A upstream cut-off wall should be constructed on the firm rocks

exposed by earth excavation as long as dewatering is possible and
the rock mass is at shallow depth. If dewatering is not possible, the
repacked concrete method is recommended. When firm rocks are too
deep to be reached and the river bed consists of sand or gravel, sheet
piles may be used. Sheet piles include concrete piles, steel sheet
piles etc. Prior to construction, test driving is required to confirm
the possibility of piling. Since sheet piles are used also for coffering,
the work schedule should be well arranged in order to reduce the
total costof the construction. Re-usage of sheet piles and partial
pre-construction of a cut-off wall to be used for dewatering or
drainageof the site are the examples of such use. Currently improved
cast-in-place concrete piling methods have made it possible to
install a continuous concrete wall by combination of piles (see Fig.
3.48). These methods are applicable to sand or sand gravel river
120
beds in the same way as sheet piles. When the riverbed contains
large gravel and neither sheet piles nor cast-in-place concrete piles
are applicable, wells or caissons are sunk and used as a cut-off wall
or a dwarf wall .In this case, special attention must be given to
construction of joint portion in order to ensure the water-cut-off
function. Grouting work may follow the above mentioned sealing
works if necessary.
Fig. 3.48 Diaphragm wall by overlapping piles
Water-seals should be carefully scaled at the inlets, the junctions

between fixed weirs and banks, and major bed(flood plane), etc.
Sheet piles are the most recommendable method for water-seal at
inlets. Extension of weir body up to the river banks is considered to
be the most safe method. The choice should be made after
considering the site conditions.
There is Lacey’s score depth formula to assume the length of vertical

cut-off. Vertical cut-off must go below the depth of scour.
R = 1.35 (q 2 / f ) 1 / 3 ………………………………..(F. 3.84)
where, R : Depth of scour (m)

q : Discharge per unit width (q = Q d / L)
Q d : Designed flood discharge (m 3 /s)
L : Length of weir (m)
f : Silt factor ( f = 1.76 √m r )
m r : Mean diameter of silt particles (mm)
When it is difficult to investigate the mean diameter of silt particles,

it can be adopted the value of silt factor on Table 3.12.
121
Table 3.12 Silt factor for various grain size

Types of soil particles Silt factor (f)
Coarse sand 1.50
Medium sand 1.25
Standard silt of lacey 1.00
Medium silt 0.85
Fine silt 0.70 to 0.50
The above-mentioned depth of scour may adopt a practical value

based on geological condition because of in some cases to become
the big value.
(2) Downstream cut-off wall

A downstream cut-off wall is installed to stabilize a weir body
against riverbed scouring at the downstream end of the apron. The
wall should extend the entire width of the weir and the retaining wall
at both sides. The depth of the wall must be decided after
consideration of the anticipated scour depth. Scour depth can
assume by formula (F. 3.84).
Since a downstream cut-off wall does not require to be watertight,

weep holes are introduced to reduce uplift. Occasionally weep holes
are also provided in the apron to reduce uplift and to prevent piping.
Drainage filter materials must be carefully selected to prevent
basement soil from flowing out of the holes. Prior to the construction
of weep holes locations and combination of weep holes must be
designed according to the length of the apron, location and depth of
upstream cut--off wall and downstream cut-off wall.
Hydraulic model tests or flow network analysis must be executed to

estimate the uplift pressures which act on a weir body and apron.
The escape gradient at the downstream end of the apron can be
calculated from these results. It is necessary to assess the risk of
piping based on the above results.
122
Downstream cut-off
Fig. 3.49 Downstream cut-off wall

Cut-off wall is constructed according creep length at floating type.
During construction time, it is not necessary to use form work.
Doing form work, gives rooms and it should be filled up. But it is
difficult to fill up fully. The room will be a water path, it makes
difficult to keep creep length.
3.2.6 Inlet
An inlet must be designed to prevent soil, sand and floating material,
which are undesirable in irrigation water, from entering the canals.
Inlets must allow the designed flow-rate and be safe fromexternal
forces. The principle of inlet design is to ensure the consistent
intake of water and prevent inflow of sand. Stability of the river
course, river meandering condition and runoff condition should be
studied to fulfill the principles.
(1) Function of Inlet

Inlet must have sufficient capacity to draw the design discharge from
a river and transfer the flow to the irrigation canal. Generally,
discharges in rivers are subject to change and at the time of flood,
large amount of soil, sand, and floating debris materials are carried
by the river flow. Thus, the inlet is expected to enable easy control of
intake discharge and prevention of the materials carried by flood
waters from flowing into the canal. For these purposes discharge
control gate, gate pillar, screen(trash rack), conduit (bank crossing
culvert etc), intake apron sand drain may have to be installed.
Minimization of maintenance and operation costs for these facilities
is important.
123
(2) Location of inlet

In case of natural intake method, inlet should be installed where the
thalweg is near to the river bank, stable and water depth is deep
enough to draw water. For example, the outside of a bend in a river
is the most preferable from the viewpoint of preventing inflow of
sediment. It is important to make sure that the water level in the
river be not lower than design intake level in the future. A diversion
weir has the merit of controlling the river surface level artificially.
When installation of inlet is possible at a river bend where the
thalweg is stable, a scouring sluice will not be required. But if the
preferred point mentioned
above is not available, a
scouring sluice is required
and the inlet should be
installed within the effective
Fig. 3.4 Apporopriate Intake Position
part of it.
When intakes are necessary at both sides, installation of inlets with
the scouring sluice at both sides of intake weir may cause sediment
accumulation and an unstable thalweg, which may cause unstable
intakes. It is better to install one intake at point where the grit is
stable even if it is far from the intake weir.
In addition, the front part of inlet has to be matched with bank of
river and it has to avoid sticking out and standing back from bank of
river. Because, if the front part of inlet sticks out from bank of river,
the part receives big destructive power. On the other hand, if the
front part of inlet stands back from bank of river, it will occur
sedimentation due to the weak flow. .
(3) Features of Inlet Design

1) Sill elevation
In case of the natural intake method, the elevation of the inlet sill
shall be decided based on the lowest base flow level ever observed.
The sill is preferred to be higher than 0.4H=h l from the lowest
drought water surface (see Fig. 3.50 (a)). As the water level
fluctuates greatly throughout the year, double leaf slide gate is
recommended in order to avoid sediment inflow. At the normal stage,
intake of surface water by overflowing the lower half of the gate is
desirable.
124
Fig. 3.50 Inlet sill elevation
The inlet elevation should be 1.0m higher than the base elevation of
the scouring sluice for prevention of sediment, if a diversion weir is
installed. There is a standard that the height from the riverbed to the
inlet elevation should be more than 1/6 of maximum flood depth of
the river, which is based on the consideration of the critical height of
sedimentation on the riverbed by flooding. The inlet elevation should
also be the same level or higher than the guide wall height of the
sediment sluiceway. However, if the width of the sediment sluiceway
is wider than the width of inlet, this does not have to be considered
strictly.
2) Intake Velocity
Generally an intake velocity of 0.6 ~ 1.0m/sec above inlet apron is
standard, which is decided based on the following two conditions'.
First, the approach velocity (velocity of the river flow just upstream
of the inlet) must not exceed 0.4m/sec so that soil particles bigger
than 0.30mm in diameter, which might be harmful for irrigation
water, will not inflow.
Another condition requires that the velocity in the main canal is

higher than 0.75m/sec to prevent the growth of aquatic plants.
3) Width of Inlet
Width of inlet is calculated by the formula (F. 3.85) with inlet apron,
elevation, design intake water level and inflow velocity.
125
B=Q/h 1 V ……………………………..(F. 3.85)
where B : inlet width(m)

Q : design intake discharge (m 3 /sec)
h 1 : water depth (design intake water level - inlet apron
elevation) (m)
V : inflow velocity (m/sec)
Large spans must be avoided by dividing them into reasonable

numbers the bays, considering the height-width ratio of the gate and
intake operation. Shape of pier must be designed to reduce
shrinkage by approaching velocity and head loss due to shrinkage.
4) Screen
A trashrack is attached just in front of the
regulation gate with an inclination of about
1:0.3 so that trash is easily evacuated. The top
of the trashrack is made round and workability
of cleaning devices must be considered (see Fig.
3.51). A fish screen that prevents fry from
entering into canals is installed right after the Fig. 3.51 Screen
trashrack if necessary.
5) Inlet Basin
An inlet basin is a transitional structure between an inlet and a head
race for putting the inflow uniform. A guide wall is usually provided
to avoid nonuniformity of flow. During floods, sedimentation usually
occurs in this section. The inlet basin must be as short as possible
and covered.
(4) Flow Discharge at Inlet

The configuration of an inlet may be of two hydraulic categories as
follows :
① Overflow type and
② Orifice type (see Fig. 3.52)
1) Overflow type inlet

Discharge is calculated using the submerged overflow formula for
126
weirs (F. 3.86).
Q  m( B  n  k  h 1 )h 2 2 g ( h 1  h 2 ) ………….(F. 3.86)
where Q : inflow discharge(m 3 /sec)

m : head loss coefficient, 0.8-0.85* when there exists a gap in
base line as inlet. (However, it becomes small when the
flow is affected by the guide wall of sand sluiceway.)
n : number of end contraction
k : coefficient for end contraction, 0.02-0.04 when the shape
of front side of. pier is circular
B : inlet width(m)
h 1 : river flow depth between the surface and inlet apron
elevation (m)
h 2 : flow depth at inlet (m)
g : acceleration of gravity(m/sec 2 )
2 v2 
if h2   h1  1  then the discharge is calculated by the
3 2g 
formula for complete overflow.

2) Orifice type inlet
Generally a surface intake (overflow type) is preferred since this type
can prevent sediment inflow better than that of an orifice type. An
orifice type inlet has the merit of lower sensitivity to change of
discharge because the discharge is in proportion to the square root
of the upstream depth. Thus the orifice type is used together with
the overflow type so that water is diverted by overflow type during
low water level and by orifice type during high water level (like a
double boarded slide gate). Discharge is calculated by the following
formula (F. 3.87) when the downstream water depth does not affect
the discharge.
 h0
Q  m  B  h 0 2 g  h 1   ………..(F. 3 .87)

 2 
where Q : inflow discharge(m 3 /sec)
m : coefficient, 0.62-0.66 (0.65 is used for design and an
adjustment should be made by measurement after the
completion of construction)
h 0 : gate opening (m)
127
h 1 : upstream water depth (m)

B : inlet width (m)
Fig. 3.52 Configuration of inlet
(5) Water Level Calculation for Inlet

The design intake elevation is calculated using the given elevation at
the head of the main canal and the following series of head losses if
necessary. The head losses are due to ;
① inflow, ⑥ abrupt or gradual increase in
② gap of base elevation, sectional area,
③ pier, ⑦ abrupt or gradual decrease in
④ screen, sectional area and
⑤ friction, ⑧ curve.
Calculation procedure is;

① Basic design of the shape of inlet with given diversion discharge,
② Calculation of each head losses due to the shape designed, and
③ Calculation of intake water elevation by adding the total head loss
to the elevation at the beginning of main canal, detailed design of
inlet structure and check calculation of head loss for the entire
facilities.
1) Head loss and change of water level by inflow
 V2 2 V1 2  V
2
V 2 V 2 
⊿he  he      f e 2   2  1  …………. (F. 3 .88)
 2g 2g 
 2 g  2 g 2 g 
where Δh e : difference in water level by inflow (m)

h e : head loss (m)
f e : head loss coefficient
V 1 : average velocity before inflow (m/sec)
V 2 : average velocity after inflow (m/sec)
128
Head loss coefficient (f e ) is due to plan feature of inlet (see Fig. 3.53)
Fig. 3.53 Shape of inlet and head loss coefficient
2) Head loss and change of water level due to elevation gap of base
line
 V2 2 V12  V
2 2
V  V1
2
⊿hc  hc      fc  2  2
 ………(F. 3.89)
 2g 2g  2g 2g
where Δh c : difference in water level due to elevation gap of base line

(m)
h c : head loss due to elevation gap
f c : head loss coefficient
V 1 : average upstream velocity of gap (m/sec)
V 2 : average downstream velocity of gap (m/sec)
Fig. 3.54 Change of water level by gap
Head loss coefficient f c is determined by the ratio of the flow

sectional areas at both sides of the gap (see Table 3.13). Cross
sectional areas are calculated as A 1 =B ･ H 1 and A 2 =B ･ H 2 respectively
where H 1 and H 2 are upstream and downstream water depths of the
gap.
Table 3.13 Head loss coefficient by elevation differnce
A 2 /A 1 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 (1.0)
fe 0.50 0.50 0.49 0.49 0.46 0.43 0.38 0.29 0.18 0.07 (0)
129
Head loss and difference in water level due to drop in elevation are
calculated by the formulae (F. 3.90 and F. 3.91).
 V2 2 V12 
⊿h t  h t     ………..(F. 3.90)

 2 g 2 g 
ht  ⊿Z 
 f  Fr 2 ,  ………..(F. 3.91)
h2  h2 
Fig. 3.55 Flow on drop
where Δh t : difference in water level (m)

h t : head loss (m)
ΔZ : elevation gap (m)
F r2 : Froude number at section 2
h 2 : flow depth at section 2
V 1 : average upstream velocity of gap (m/sec)
V 2 : average downstream velocity of gap (m/sec)
Head loss h t is a function of F r 2 and ΔZ / h 2 and is shown in Fig. 3.56.

Fig. 3.57 shows the critical condition for the control section (line-a is
for steep gap and line-b is for inclined or gradual gap). For a given ΔZ
/ h 2 , if Froude number F r 2 exceeds a certain limit, the section above
the gap becomes a control section. For the area below the lines where
there is no control section, the formula (F. 3.91) is applicable.
Further, section 2 in the Fig. 3.55 is supposed to be 30·4Z
downstream from the gap.
130
Fig. 3.56 Head loss (h r ) calculation of drop
Fig. 3.57 Critical condition of occurrence of controlling section at drop
Fig. 3.58 Change of water level by piers
3) Change of water level due to piers

D'Aubuisson's formula (F. 3.92) is used to calculate the change of
water level due to piers.
Q2  1 1 
⊿h p   ………..(F. 3.92)
2 g  c 2b2 2 ( H  ⊿h p ) 2 b12 H12 
 
where Ah p : difference in water level (m)

Q : flow discharge (m 3 /sec)
c : coefficient of plan feature (see Fig. 3.59)
131
b 1 : anal width upstream side of piers (m)

b 2 : b 1 - Σt ; sectional flow area at piers
t : pier width (m)
H 1 : flow depth upstream side of piers (m)
Fig. 3.59 Shape of pier and C value
Formula (F. 3.92) is implicit so trial and error method is necessary.
4) Head loss and change of water level due to screen
V 2 V 2  V
2 V 2 V 2 
⊿hr  hr   2  1   f r 1   2  1  …………(F. 3.93)
 2g 2g  2 g  2 g 2 g 
 
4/3 2
t V1
hr   sin     …………(F. 3.94)
b 2g
Where
Δh r : difference in water level (m)
h r : head loss (m)
f r : head loss coefficient
β : coefficient for sectional shape of screen bar (see
Fig. 3.60)
θ : inclination of screen (degree),
t : bar screen thickness (m)
b : bar interval (m)
V 1 : upstream average velocity (m/sec)
V 2 : downstream average velocity (m/sec)
132
Fig. 3.60 Coefficient of section shape of screen and bar
Formula (F. 3.93) treats only a case without trash obstructing the
screen and an adjustment calculation for actual conditions is
necessary (see Fig. 3.61).
Formula (F. 3.95) is used to calculate head loss by trash*.
4/3
t   a 
f r  6 . 69 sin    exp  0 . 074γw  ………. (F. 3.95)
b  H 
where H s : head loss due to trash (m)

a : trash sticking height(m)
γ w : unit weight of wet trash** (kg/m 3 )
Other notations are same as those in formulae (F. 3.93) and (F. 3.94).
Fig. 3.62 is the calculation condition. Trash sticking height ratio
a/H is usually assumed to be 0.1 as a standard. Since this ratio may
affect the intake discharge and the choice of weir crest elevation,
the ratio has to be decided after considering river conditions.
133
Fig. 3.61
Change of water level by trash
Fig. 3.62
Latticed type screen
5) Head loss due to friction
2 gn 2 L V 2
h f  1/ 3  
R R 2 g ……..(F. 3.96)
where h f : frictional head loss (m)
n : roughness coefficient (0.014 ~ 0.015 for concrete lining
canal )
V : average velocity (m/sec)
L : canal length(m)
R : hydraulic mean depth(m)
If uniform flow is assumed to occur, the head loss by friction is

calculated as; h f =IL, where I=canal bed slope and L=canal length.
6) Head loss and change of water level due to abrupt increase in flow
area
V 2 V 2  V 2 V 2 
⊿hse  hse   2  1   he  h f   2  1  ……….(F. 3.97)
 2g 2g   2g 2g 
   
2
V
he  f e 2 ……….(F. 3.98)
2g
134
n 2   V1 V2 
2 2
hf   ……….(F. 3.99)
2  R14 / 3 R2 4 / 3 
where Δh s e : water level difference (m)

h s e : head loss due to increase in flow area (m)
h e : head loss due to abrupt change of shape (m)
h f : head loss due to friction between section 1
and 2 (m)
f e : head loss coefficient (see Fig. 3.64)
V 1 : average velocity before increase in f-low area
(m/sec)
V 2 : average velocity after increase in flow area
(m/sec)
R 1 : hydraulic mean depth before (m)
R 2 : hydraulic mean depth after (m)
n : roughness coefficient
l : length between section 1 and 2
Fig. 3.63 Water flow in abrupt increase of flow area
The head loss coefficient f e is due to width ratio b1/b2 (see Fig. 3.64).
If the Froude number F r 2  V 2 / gh 2 is bigger than a certain value,
the depth at flow area changing point becomes a critical depth and
there occurs a control section. The area above each line in Fig. 3.65
135
is the area where flow is subcritical. The Lower area represent's

supercritical flow. Fig. 3.64 shows fe for subcritical flow. Further the
length e between section 1 and 2 is suggested to be about 30(b2-b1).
Fig. 3.64 Head loss coefficient by abrupt increase of flow area
Fig. 3.65 Critical condition by controlling section of abrupt increase of

flow area
7) Head loss due to gradual increase in flow area

2
(V1  V2 ) 2   A1  V12 V1
2
hge  f ge  
 f ge 1      f ge f se ……………..(F. 3.100)
2g   A2  2 g 2g
where
136
h ge : head loss due to gradual increase inflow area (m)

f ge : head loss coefficient for gradual increase (see Fig.
3.66)
f s e : head loss coefficient due to abrupt increase (see Table
3.14)
V 1 : average velocity before change of flow area (m/sec)
V 2 : average velocity after change of flow area (m/sec)
Fig. 3.66 Head loss coefficient for gradual increase
Table 3.14 Head loss coefficient by sudden enlargement

A 1 /A 2 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 (1.0)
fse 1.00 0.98 0.92 0.82 0.70 0.56 0.41 0.26 0.13 0.04 (0)
8) Head loss and change of water level due to abrupt shrinkage of

flow area
V 2 V 2  V 2 V 2 
⊿hsc  hsc   2  1   hc  h f   2  1  ………….(F. 3.101)
 2g 2g   2g 2g 
   
2
V2
hc  f c ………….(F. 3.102)
2g
n 2  V12 V2 
2
hf   ………….(F. 3.103)
2  R14 / 3 R2 4 / 3 
where
Δh s c : water level difference due to abrupt shrinkage of
flow area (m)
h s c : head loss due to shrinkage (m)
137
h c : head loss due to shape change (m)

h f : head loss due to friction through the transition section
with length of e (m)
f c : head loss coefficient for shape change (see Fig. 3.68)
V 1 : average velocity before shrinkage (m/sec)
V 2 : average velocity after shrinkage (m/sec)
g : acceleration of gravity (m/see 2 )
R 1 : hydraulic mean depth before shrinkage (m)
R 2 : hydraulic mean depth after shrinkage (m)
n : roughness coefficient
l : length of shrinkage section (m)
Fig. 3.67
Abrupt shrinkage flow
Fig. 3.68
Energy loss at abrupt
shrinkage
Head loss coefficient for abrupt shrinkage f c is related to the Froude

number F r 2 and width ratio b 2 /b 1 (see Fig. 3.68). The flow condition is
judged from Fig. 3.69. The coefficient f c in Fig. 3.68 can be applied to
all conditions. Shrinkage coefficient C C as shown in Fig. 3.67 is
obtained from Fig. 3.69.
9) Head loss due to gradual shrinkage of flow

2
V
hgc  f gc 2 ……….(F. 3.104)
2g
where h gc : head loss(m)

f gc : head loss coefficient (see Fig. 3.70)
138
V 2 : average velocity after shrinkage (m/sec)
Fig. 3.69 Flow condition in abrupt shrinkage (open flow channel)
Fig. 3.70 Head loss of gradual shrinkage (pipe)
10) Change of water level due to curvature of flow

Boussinesq-Lahmeyer's formula is used to calculate change of water
level by curvature effect.
I 3 b
 1 ………..(F. 3.105)
I0 4 R
where
I 0 : bed slope
I : surface slope
b : flow width (m)
R : radius of curvature (m)
⊿hb  L( I  I 0 ) …………(F. 3.106)
139
where
Δh b : water level difference (m)
L : radius of curvature (m)

In principel, the inlet elevation should be 1.0m higher than the
base elevation of the scouring sluice for prevention of sand if a
diversion weir is constructed. However, it is difficult to keep 1.0m
for consideration of influence on upstream, this height can be
reduced but as much as possible to take the difference between
inlet elevation and the base elevation of the scouring sluice. Refer
to 3.2.6 (3). Intake level required for sand–flushing function.
Formula is below;
Loss calculation
⊿ he=he+V 2 2 ÷(2×g)-V 1 2 ÷(2×g)
he=fe×V 2 2 ÷(2×g)
⊿ he: Change of water level due to inflow
he: Head loss due to inflow
fe: inflow head loss coefficient=0.5
V 1 : Just in front of intake flow in Velocity=0m/s
V 2 : flow in Velocity Q÷A 2
g: gravity acceleration
h 1 :water depth of intake
B:wide of intake
Q:amount of intake
A 2 :Area of after intake=B×(h 1 -⊿ he)
Calculation Example
B=3.5m, h 1 =0.6m, Q=1.5m 3 /s
At first ⊿ he is assume 0.046m
h 1 - ⊿ he=0.6m-0.05m=0.554m
A 1 =3.5m×0.6m=2.1m 2
A 2 =3.5m×0.554m=1.939m 2
V 2 =Q÷A2=1.5m3/s÷1.939m2=0.77m/s
he=fe×V 2 2 ÷(2×g)=0.5×(0.77m/s) 2 ÷(2×9.8m/s 2 )=0.0153m
140
⊿ he=he+V 2 2 ÷(2×g)-V 1 2 ÷(2×g)

=0.0153m+(0.77m/s) 2 ÷(2×9.8m/s 2 )-(0m/s)2÷(2×9.8m/s 2 )
=0.0458m
Result of calculation is almost same as assumed ⊿he. So assumed
⊿ he is proper.
This calculation needs trial and error. For easy calculation the
width of inlet, the ”goal seek” function of excel is useful.
3.2.7 Gate
The gate structure must be watertight to ensure stable water intake
and firm enough against several external forces like flowing water.
Steady and smooth operational workability is also required for its
function.
A gate is one of the most important facilities to control both water
utilization and floods. The following conditions are to be fulfilled for
the purpose of water use and flood control. Conditions required from
the view point of Water use are;
① to keep a constant required water level and to control intake
level and discharge and
② to have water tightness.
On the other hand, conditions required from the view point of flood
control are;
① capability of being operated quickly and smoothly so as to
release water safely and
② to remain workable without accumulation of material carried
by water.
Structural stability and endurability are also required.
(1) Selection of type of gate

Type of gate is decided after considering its purpose, installation
location, cases of operation, safety, dependability and economy of
water intake function, especially from the view point of effective
usage of the water resources, appropriate style and operation
method to reduce over diversion.
Materials available for gates include steel (including east steel),

aluminum, stainless steel, rubber and FRP (fiberglass reinforced
141
plastic). This section covers a steel gate. When using materials other
than steel for gate, the characteristic features of the material for
gate should be studied carefully.
1) Type of gate
(a) Vertical lift gate ; Fixed wheel type gate
Slide gate
Double leaf gate
Stop-log
(b) Hinged type gate; Radial gate
Sector gate
Mitre gate
Flap gate
Swing gate
(c) Other type
2) Definition of Gate
The gate structure consists of a gate leaf, guide frame, pivot and
hoisting equipment. The gate leaf is the part which receives the
hydraulic load and conveys it to pivot. The guide frame is the
embedded part in concrete and adjacent to the sealing part of the
leaf to prevent water leakage. The pivot is part of a hinged type gate
which transmit the external force (load) to the concrete. 'The guide
frame covers this function for a vertical lift type gate. The hoist is the
equipment which operates a gate leaf.
3) Specific features of each gate

(a) Fixed wheel type gate :
With a fixed wheel type gate the hydraulic load is transmitted to a
horizontal main girder through the skin plate (sheet metal) and its
supporting girder. The load is finally transmitted to the guide frame
by way of vertical end girders at each side of the gate leaf and wheel.
A shell type transmit the load through its box type body. The gate
leaf usually raised vertically by wire rope or spindle hoist. Since this
type gate is mechanically and structurally simple, hoisting load is
lighter than for slide gate and is more dependable, this type is the
most frequently used as a barrage gate. The applied range is also
been wide from small gates to long span gates.
142
Fig. 3.71 Fig. 3.72

Fixed wheel type gate Types of fixed wheel type gate
Three types are classified by leaf structure and generally defined by

height of leaf(H), width (L) and their ratio (H/L). Stiffness must be
considered for long span gate. H/L should be kept large to maintain
gate body safety against leakage by bending due to direct sunshine.
The shape of rubber seal should also be carefully considered.
Vibration at partial opening flow should also be cheeked. Upstream
and downstream water levels and gate opening heights affect
vibration occurring conditions. Perfect outflow never causes
vibration but submerged outflow may cause it for reasons of
interference by hydraulic jump, waves right after the gate and swirl
over the bottom plate. Interference by hydraulic jump can be avoided
by changing the angle of the bottom plate to about 20 degrees. Long
term operation with a small opening and submerged outflow should
be avoided.
(b) Double leaf gate :

A double leaf gate can control discharges and suspended load can be
easily passed through. Control discharge and reduced height of piers
are significant features. If control of discharge is the main purpose,
the range of intake discharge must be decided in considering the
intake method, operation method and the river condition.
A double leaf gate has a complex mechanism for sealing, guide frame
and operation and H/L ratio have to be smaller than the other types.
Stability of these mechanism should be checked carefully. A spoiler
143
(that separates vein of water and supplies air behind the leaf) or
other reasonable treatment is required to minimize vibration.
Double leaf gates are divided into three types due to structural
differences.
a) Double leaf gate ; Two shell type or girder type gates are
combined. Track rail and a hoist are installed to operate each
leaf.
b) Hook shape type gate ; Hook type gate leaf is installed for upper
leaf and combined with lower wheel gate. Bottom wheel of upper
leaf transmits load by rolling on the skin plate (sheet metal) of
the lower leaf. A hoist is usually used.
c) Shell type with flap ; This is a combination type of a flap gate for
the upper gate and a shell type gate for the lower gate. Since the
sealing mechanism and hoisting mechanism are comparatively
simple, this type has been adapted as regulating gate for the
diversion weir. The hoist part consists of both upper and lower
operative winches and has a mechanism that makes it possible
for the two hoists to work together. Further, the leaf height of
the upper part flap gate should be less than one third of the total
height of the gate.
Fig. 3.73 Types of double leaf gate
(c) Slide gate:

This type is suitable for a relatively small span and water level
difference. The mechanism is simple as a metal plate can be used for
guide frame. Operation under hydraulic load causes a large load for
hoisting since the gate leaf has to slide on the guide frame. Thus,
this type is not suitable for large gate leaves unless operated under
balanced water pressure. The spindle of an oil-pressure- operated
144
cylinder is generally used as the servomotor system.
(d) Stop-log :
Stop-log is a kind of gate that is used for small gate and discrete
operation when main gate is under repair. Horizontally divided
leaves are placed on top of each stair. A portable winch also used for
storage of the stop logs is also desirable. A floating type and a shield
type leaf are also used during temporally gate repair.
Fig. 3.74 Slide type gate Fig. 3.75 Gate types for repairing
(e) Radial Gate:

This gate has a circular-arc-shape leaf with a trunnion pin at the
center of the circular arc.Hydraulic load is transmitted through the
skin-plate, support beam, main beam, gate arm and trunnion pin to
pedestal. A radial gate does not have a track rail and is hydraulically
and mechanically advanced. It rotates around the trunnion pins and
it operated economically as the hoisting load is relatively small. On
the other hand, its mechanism is complex as compared with a wheel
gate. Since it has many parts of low-stiffness and the total load is
concentrated on the trunnion pin, discussion and alternative
studies are required for its design, construction and installation.
Since over-flowing water interferes with its parts, mechanical
weakness and restriction of over-flow height, this type is not
prevalent for intake gates.
145
Fig. 3.76 Radial gate Fig. 3.77 Miter gate
(f) Mitre Gate and Swing Gate :

Mitre gates are vertically divided into two leaves and a swing gate
has one leaf. Both gate open by swinging horizontally around vertical
axes at the end of the leaf(s). Since it has a relatively small operation
load and no restriction for pass-through height, this type is widely
used as a navigation gate. Symmetrical design for reverse pressure is
required and this type has the disadvantage that operating parts are
always under-water, that maintenance is not easy and that
operation in a river with sand or mud pile is dangerous. Location of
its installation is the most important point to be considered.
(g) Sector Gate :

This is a kind of radial gate that is operated horizontally with a pair
of leaves. Rotating operation makes the operating load small
compared with mitre gates this type is more complex. This type has
the advantage that it is suitable for reverse hydraulic load, that
there is no restriction for passing through height and that it does not
requires a water level control facility to keep a suitable balance
between inside and outside of heads. The disadvantage is that
operation and maintenance are difficult as with a mitre gate and that
it requires large operation space for leafs. This type has been
adopted for large span gates that have to allow the passage of a large
vessel passing because wheel gates cannot fulfill the height
requirement.
146
Fig. 3.78 Sector gate
(h) Flap gate :

This type of gate is installed on the overflow portion of a weir or dam
with the hinge pin beneath a leaf of shell type or plate girder type. It
rotates around the pin for operation. It may also be installed over a
long span wheel gate. In comparison with a wheel gate, a smaller
sectional area for the leaf is made possible by a multi-point hinge
system and it is applicable to the case of small ratio between height
of leaf and span. Regulation by overflow makes it easy to control the
downstream discharge and automatic operation is also possible by
using hydraulic load. Further, this type requires-fewer and shorter
piers. On the other hand, when as being installed directly on the
riverbed, a 0.2 to 1.0m (or about 30% of leaf height) gap is required
where hinges are installed. Sand piles or residue at the back surface
of a leaf may cause imperfect flapping or damage to the leaf and
cylinder. A spoiler is required to avoid dangerous vibration by
overflow. A sand removal facility has to be considered if sand flow is
significant. Stainless-clad steel is preferred to be used as skin plate
(sheet metal) because of the inefficiency of coating. Flap gates are
classified into the following types according to leaf structure,
operation system and operation mechanism.
147
a) Leaf structure; i) Torque shaft type

ii) Horizontal main girder type
iii) Shell type (Fish belly type)
b) Operating system; i) End leaf operation type that has

operation system at the end of leaf.
ii) Middle support type that has
operation system at the middle of
leaf.
c) Operating mechanism; i) Mechanical type
ii) Servomotor type
Final design is decided from a combination of these types and

categories and according to the site conditions installation location
and operating condition.
Fig. 3.79 Types of flap gate
(i) Sluice Valve (Gate Valve) :

This type consists of a valve body that corresponds to the leaf of
agate and casing as well as operation system that corresponds to
guide frame or pivot. Since this has a simple mechanism and is
cheap, it is used as the control valve
for a conduit. It must be installed at
the end of the conduit to allow enough
air supply and a single taper valve is
helpful in preventing valve vibration
when operated at partial openings.
Careful maintenance is required for
residues like sand in and around the
guide rail. Fig. 3.80 Sluice valve
148
(j) Rubber Gate:

This is a kind of weir made of rubber that is directly installed upon
the riverbed. Air or water is used to form inflate of the rubber tube.
Picture 3.3 Rubber dam
Fig. 3.81 Facilities of rubber dam
(2) Lifting Height

The gate lifting height must be decided to allow safe flow down of the
design discharge. The height of the lower end of the leaf for a vertical
opening gate is calculated (as freeboard of each bank plus) release
design high water level. Clearance in a conduit should be as high as
top height of the conduit.
(3) Material
Materials must be selected to be suitable for the specific purpose of
each gate type.
149
(4) Dimension of gate for Slide gate and Stop-log

The standard of the relationship between height, width and
thickness of skin plate (sheet metal) and upstream water height of
Slide gate and Stop-log is shown in Table 3.2.100.
Table 3.2.100 Dimension of gate for Slide gate and Stop-log

Upstream water height of gate (m)
1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
1.0 x 1.0 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 11 11
1.5 x 1.0 - 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 13
2.0 x 1.0 - - 8 9 10 11 12 12 13
Skin
2.5 x 1.0 - - - 9 10 11 12 12 13
plate
3.0 x 1.0 - - - - 10 11 12 12 13
(Height
1.0 x 2.0 7 8 9 11 12 12 13 14 15
x
1.5 x 2.0 - 11 13 14 15 17 18 19 20
Width)
2.0 x 2.0 - - 15 16 18 19 21 22 23
2.5 x 2.0 - - - 18 20 21 23 24 25
3.0 x 2.0 - - - - 21 22 24 25 27
Note; Inside of is thickness of skin plate (mm)
Upstream water
height of gate
Gate (Skin plate)

In Ethiopian case a gate should consider the water and debris pressure
not to be bended and it has to consider the operation. If the skin plate
(sheet metal) is big and heavy at one gate, it should be separated two
gate.
150
3.2.8 Related Structures

Related Structures are attached to a weir or intake gate to upgrade
functions of the intake facility. They are to be installed where
necessary to keep the river function and must be functional and
reliable for their purposes.
(1) Settling Basin

Settling basin is used to settle and exclude sand which may flow into
an intake facility under certain river conditions and which may
obstruct canals and degrade their functions.
Picture 3.4 Settling basin
A settling basin must be effective in exclusion of sand particles and

have a proper hydraulic design for design discharge and site
conditions. One is required where the intake discharge is high and
harmful sand will inflow. For example, an intake without a diversion
dam or a weir constructed at a steep-flow-section of a river will
require a settling basin. A settling basin is also one of the most
important facilities for a weir which is installed on a mountain
stream where the discharge and riverbed changes. A weir with a high
intake apron which is constructed at a slow-flow-section of the river
and that works as a settling basin does not have to have a separate
settling basin.
151
1) Selection of site
A settling basin should be installed adjacent to the intake and a
head of the canal. When it is to be constructed downstream it should
be as near to the intake as possible if connective installation to
intake is impossible. The slower the inflow velocity, the more
effectively sand is settled. To have larger flow area, the headrace
should be as wide as the intake width. Transition angles should also
be as small as possible so as to regulate the flow. The inflow
direction should be the same as the center line of the settling basin.
When the headrace has to be curved, uneven flow must be avoided.
When a settling basin is installed separately from the intake,
velocity control in the headrace is important to ensure that sand
does not settle in the headrace bed and to avoid a large velocity
which would accelerate sand inflow. Enough drop in head is required
for natural clearing of sand which settles in the settling basin.
2) Characteristics and settling capacity of inflow sediment

Diameter distribution of inflow sand must be studied by sediment
investigation to determine the minimum and maximum diameter of
inflow particles. The minimum diameter of the particle acceptable in
irrigation water is generally 0.3mm. Multi-purpose water usage
including city and industrial water supply has different regulations
for maximum acceptable diameter according to usage. For example
for city water supply 0.1mm or larger diameter particles must be
settled out.
Sand particles to be settled in settling basin are conveyed as bed

load in general. When water flow in the settling basin, it follows a
gradient and is well regulated to avoid uneven flow. Large particles
settle at the basin mouth due to an equilibrium between the critical
tractive force and the tractive force at the sand surface, and a
terrace is formed as shown in Fig. 3.82. The front surface of the
terrace moves forward as sediments increase.
Fig. 3.82 Sedimentation in settling basin
152
Small particles which do not settle at the enterance as well as those

which are carried as suspended load form thin bed load in front of
the terrace. A location (piling thickness is about 25 cm in depth)
where the tractive force in the basin and the critical tractive force for
the minimum diameter particle come to their equilibrium and- where
there is no refloating, is first determined. The allowable settling limit
is defined as the condition when the design diameter particle is
settled at the location mentioned above. In reaching the allowable
settling limit, the distance for complet settlement of the minimum
diameter particle should be completed is about 10 times the terrace
height from the terrace front. The total capacity of the settling basin
is generally calculated by adding the terrace length to this distance.
The capacity of the sedimentation ditch is determined by the total
amount of inflow sand. Since the amount changes by season, a
separate sedimentation ditch in parallel, which can also be operated
properly, helps to make the capacity smaller.
3) Hydraulic structure of settling basin

Settling basin must have a proper shape for the design discharge
and site conditions, and must be effective for settling of the design
diameter particle. It must function to exclude sediment easily and be
an appropriate hydraulic structure for operation and maintenance.
The sedimentation ditch should preferably be symmetrized and have
a rectangular section in the flow direction. Existing basins differing
from that described above have been proved to be inefficient and
unsuitable for settling as well as exclusion. The side overflow type in
particular tends to allow large diameter particles to pass and is not
recommended. Parallel separation into more than two rows is
preferred for reasons of water usage and operation. A wide
sedimentation ditch without any separation wall may have low
effectiveness in settling and difficulty in exclusion of sand. A
relatively deep basin contributes to high efficiency in settling and
exclusion, and exclusion may be possible in normal operation.
4) Transition part
Uneven or inverse flow is to be avoided in the transition part. When
the subcritical flow area of the headrace increases sharply at the
transition part, separation of the stream line and uneven or reverse
153
flow occurs and the effective area of settling basin and effectiveness
of settling decreases. A wider headrace and smaller angle of
transition are preferred. separation of stream line starts to occur
when the angle is more than 10 degrees. Transition parts which have
a larger angle should have appropriate regulation treatment. There
are several ways to regulate flow such as use of a guide wall,
regulating grating and multi-hole board. The following methods are
most effective.
(a) Where a constant water level is possible, reverse gradient

transition is recommended to keep the flow area constant through
the section (see Fig. 3.83). A short level portion (3 to 4m) follows the
reverse gradient section and a 45 degrees inclined drop connects
this to the sedimentation ditch. Separating walls should be extended
back to end point of the reverse gradient section. A drainage pipe
(100mm in diameter) is required to exclude water which is still
ponding in the settling basin after stopping of operation.
(b) When the intake water level tends to change, and a constant
water level is difficult to maintain, a regulating pipe (see Fig. 3.83)
which has constant flow area through the pipe is recommended.
Fig. 3.83 Method of regulating flow in transition part
The bed of this pipe should have level or reverse gradient subject to
site conditions. This method is applicable when the transition part
crosses a road. This can be used as a spillway by installing a trough
at the beginning of the pipe or as a cleaning channel of suspended
materials. When separating the sedimentation ditch, separate pipes
should be provided and regulation gates are preferred at the
154
beginning of the pipe.
5) Width and depth of sedimentation ditch

The width and depth of the sedimentation ditch is determined so as
to be suitable for site conditions and discharge. Effective dimensions
for settling and excluding sediment are selected. For efficient
transportation and sedimentation in the sedimentation ditch and for
the relationship between the actual tractive force and the critical
tractive force in the sedimentation ditch, the width and depth of a
sedimentation ditch, which has even rectangular cross section,
should be decided as follows.
(a) Level bed;
Q
B ………(F. 3.107)
hu
where B : width of sedimentation ditch (m)

h : water depth at the allowable-critical limit (m)
Q : design discharge (m 3 /sec)
u : critical tractive force for suspended solid (m/sec)
A standard of the critical tractive force for suspended solid is about
80% of the settling velocity of minimum diameter particle. (in case of
d=0.03cm, u =0.20m/sec)
(b) Supercritical flow flushing;

1/ 2
 2 Q 2 
B   h  2   h …………(F. 3.108)
 h 
Where B : width of sedimentation ditch (m)
h : water depth at the allowable critical limit (m)
Q : design discharge (m 3 /sec)
a = 1.0 ~ 1.2, velocity change coefficient
k = τc /( pi )
τ c : critical tractive force (t/m 2 )
p : unit weight of water (t·sec 2 /m 4 )
i : gradient of sedimentation ditch ( i > 1/100)
Iwagaki's formula
0.0065m≦ d ≦ 0.0565cm, U*c 2 =τ c /p=8.41d 11 /32 (cm 2 /sec 2 )
155
Fig. 3.84 shows the relation between B and h under several

conditions mentioned in the figure. Values are calculated using
Iwagaki's formula. For a case when both formulae (F. 3.107) and (F.
3.108) are applicable, the larger value is to be taken for B with using
a h value. Since the thickness of sediment at the point where the
minimum diameter particle has settled completely is D (about 25cm,
mentioned above), the depth of settling channel (H) at this point is;
H=D+h …………(F. 3.109)
If the calculated width of sedimentation ditch is too wide compared
with its depth, it can be separated by walls to have a smaller
capacity of each ditch so that the basin can be improved from view
points of structure and water usage.
Fig. 3.84 Relation between width and water depth at critical

section of allowable settling
The relationship between width and depth of the sedimentation ditch

is predominantly determined by site conditions. The depth should
preferably be less than 3m to enable it to exclude sediment
naturally.
6) Length of sedimentation ditch

Length is calculated to be enough for settling of the minimum
particle in Paragraph 2) above. Since decision on the length is not
156
easy, several formulae should be tried before deciding with

allowance for safety factor. Width and depth are calculated by any
formulae on the basis that the actual tractive force at the point
where minimum particle is settled completely should be less than
the critical tractive force for the particle.
(a) Formula from sedimentation theory;
h Q
LK uK
vg Bvg ………(F. 3.110)
Where L :length of sedimentation ditch (m)

K : safety factor (1.5 - 2.0)
h : water depth at a point where minimum particle is
settled completely (m)
B : width of sedimentation ditch (m)
U : average velocity in the sedimentation ditch
(0.2m/sec or so)
Vg : critical settling velocity (m/sec)
Q : design discharge in sedimentation ditch (m 3 /sec)
The formula (F. 3.110) is from sedimentation theory. It includes

some theoretically irrational points according to actual
sedimentation condition of the particles range in settling basin. It
gives proper values for width and depth of the ditch. This formula is
concluded to be applicable for length design calculation using an
appropriate safety factor considering design conditions.
Table 3.16 Allowable critical sedimentation speed in muddy water

Specific
gravity of grain size
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 1.2 3.0
muddy (mm)
water
1.100 Vg m/sec 0.003 0.0l 0.025 0.049 0.085 0.14 0.194
1.064 Vg m/sec 0.005 0.015 0.032 0.007 0.10 0.192 0.217
157
Fig. 3.85 Relation between diameter (d) of sandy gravel

and settling velocity (V g )
(b) Formula on the basis of detaching length of the flow on gapped

bed (reference);
L   1   2   3 ……….(F. 3.111)
where L : length of sedimentation ditch (m)

 1 : length of sediment terrace (m)
 2 : distance from terrace front to the point further than
whom there is no re-floating of sediment (m)
( l 2 ≒ 10 W' ),
W: gap height at the beginning of sedimentation ditch,
W': height of terrace front ( W' ≒ W )
 3 : excess length (m), about gap height at the end of the
sedimentation ditch
158
Fig. 3.86 Each factor on sedimentation in setting basin
Terrace length l 1 is an important element for decision of the capacity

of sedimentation ditch. This is initially determined roughly
according to site condition, inflow volume of and and operation
method. Check calculations are required using several other
formulae.
(c) Empirical formula;
L  20 Q ……….(F. 3.112)
where L : length of sedimentation ditch (m)
Q : design discharge in the ditch (m 3 /sec)
The formula above is applicable to discharges between 1 and 5

m 3 /sec and using a supposition that L=20m when Q=1m 3 /sec. This
formula has been proved to give appropriate results when the ratio
between B and h is nearly equal to 1.25 and the diameter range of
minimum particle is 0.3 to 0.5 mm. This formula is applicable for
rough calculations.
7) Gradient of sedimentation ditch

A settling basin, which excludes sediment naturally, employs
supercritical flow to clean sediment out from the basin with a given
gradient to sedimentation ditch. The steeper the gradient, the more
effective the flushing work. The steeper gradient causes a bigger
tractive force so that a longer length is required until the tractive
force decreases to design level. Finally the gradient is decided
considering both conditions of settling and flushing as well as site
and discharge conditions. 1/50 to 1/70 is dominant in general for
the gradient. When there is enough drop, a steep gradient of 1/10 at
159
the end of sedimentation ditch is preferable to make flushing easy.

Cross sectional gradients which make the bed shape like the bottom
of a ship may help flushing but its effectiveness is small for a wide
ditch. Separation of the basin into narrow ditch is more effective
without cross sectional gradients. This type has bigger capacity and
high performance with supercritical flow flushing and proper
operation. A settling basin which employs artificial flushing should
have a level bed and enough width for convenience of machinery
operation using a power shovel, bladeless sand pump, etc. When a
sand pump is used after collecting sand in a pond, a bed gradient is
required.
8) Hydraulic structure of flushing pipe

Natural flushing of sediment in a sedimentation ditch requires
appropriate values of each items as follows and their combination.
The items are gradient of ditch, transition at the end of channel to
sand flushing pipe, flushing head between the beginning and the end
of sand flushing pipe, gradient of the pipe, attachment angle of the
pipe to sedimentation ditch and relations between sand flushing
discharge and width of the ditch, and between the discharge and
cross sectional shape of the flushing pipe.
When there is enough drop head for a flushing pipe, steeper gradient
should be applied for the end section (5 ~ 10m) of the channel and
the water level at the entrance of the sand flushing pipe should be
lower than design flushing water level in the ditch (see Fig. 3.87).
Fig. 3.87 Tr ansition f ro m e nd of di tch to san d flush pipe , with e noug h drop he a d
160
Fig. 3.88 Transition from end of ditch to sand flush pipe
Table 3.17 Schaffernak experiment about relation between grain

size (d) and flow velocity (v)
Grain size(d)(cm) unit 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0
Traction starting
m/sec 0.35 0.75 1.30 1.70 1.80
flow velocity ( v 0 )
Traction Continuing
m/sec 0.28 0.50 0.85 1.15 1.26
Traction Stopping
m/sec 0.20 0.40 0.62 0.87 0.98
And the cross sectional area and gradient of the pipe should be large
enough to flush sediment out of the pipe. Circular and rectangular
shapes are both applicable for the pipe. The shock wave caused by
the transition part at the end of the sedimentation ditch and a
proper balance between flushing discharge of sediment and width of
the ditch and between the discharge and cross section of rectangular
shape pipe make supercritical flushing in settling basins possible for
any flushing head.
A multi-lane sedimentation ditch in a basin and a
reverse-gradient-transition part to the basin make simultaneous
operation of usual operation and sediment flushing possible. The
velocity caused by drop for flushing is 1.2 to 1.5 times faster than
usual operation and the effects of the reverse gradient is remarkable.
Design flushing discharge of sediment is equal to the discharge of
each ditch. The relationship between the width of the sedimentation
ditch and of the rectangular-shaped flushing pipe is calculated by
the formula (F. 3.113).
161
b


2 　　1  2  / B 2 
B  2   
2
8 Fr1  ………..(F. 3.113)
2   1  1
 B   1  2  / B 2 

Where B : width of sedimentation ditch (m)

b : width of rectangular-shape pipe (m)
l : length of transition to pipe (m)
F r1 : Froude number in the sedimentation ditch
When h 2 <h c 2 between the critical depth (h c 2 ) and the depth of shock
wave (h 2 ) against the width of flushing pipe (b), the shock wave
enters the flushing pipe, maintaining supercritical flow conditions
and formula (F. 3.114) comes into effect.
1  8 Fr1 
h1
1　　  1
2  1  2  /  2 
h2
  B 
…………(F. 3.114)
hc 2 Q2
3
gb 2
Where Q : sand flushing discharge (m 3 /sec)

h 1 : critical depth in sedimentation ditch (m)
Fig. 3.89 shows the relationship between the formulae (F. 3.113) and
(F. 3.114). The ratio b/B is the functions of F r 1 and of l/B. In the
regime where h 2 /h c 2 <1, the values b/B and l/B are read on the
specific line of F r 1 , and b as well as l are determined.
The length of transition is to be doubled for safety. The height of

flushing pipe (H) is subject to relationship with its width (b). When
there is no back-water affect from the river at the outlet of the
flushing pipe, the slope of the pipe should be nearly same as that of
the settling channel and H should be larger than hc 2 for smooth
flushing. When the water level of the river is high at the outlet of the
flushing pipe, the hydraulic jump height (h 3 ) at the inlet of flushing
pipe may be found in Fig. 3.90 and the height of the pipe (H) should
162
be larger than the hydraulic jump height (h 3 ). The ceiling of the pipe
should be level. When sedimentation ditch is multi ditch, sediment
is gathered into a collecting pond from each ditch using connecting
pipes and then flushed through a flushing pipe. The connecting
pipes should curve naturally for smooth inflow. Several site
condition may permit right angle curving at a transition portion
which is installed at a side of each ditch.
Fig. 3.89 Relation between Width ratio of sand flush pipe and
sedimentation ditch, ratio of length of curve and
width of sedimentation ditch, ratio of Froude No.
and depth of shock wave
9) Related structures
Regulating gate, flushing gate, spillway, etc. may be installed as
related structures. A regulating gate for a water intake is installed
around intake mouth. When it has to be installed within the
headrace the installation location should be sufficiently apart from
163
settling basin to avoid a distortion of flow by gate operation on the

flow regime in the settling basin.
When a flap gate is installed for regulating of the intake discharge in
a conduit as a part of the headrace, unexpected noise or vibration
may occur according to the flow and weather conditions. These
problems have to be taken care of. A regulating gate is installed at
the inlet of each sedimentation ditch for controlled flushing of sand.
This kind of gate is not required when an adverse slope is introduced
to make regulation and flushing possible together with normal
operation. At the end of each sedimentation ditch, a flushing gate is
installed and a regulating gate or a weir to keep the design water
level in the sedimentation ditch. A weir is preferred to keep a stable
water level.
A spillway is installed in the middle of a headrace or right before a
settling basin for the security downstream reaches. If the locations
mentioned above are not available for installation due to site
conditions, the spillway can be installed in the side of the
sedimentation ditch. When the settling basin is designed for
disposal of the particles of pollutant affected sand, access roads are
required for machinery like a conveyer truck and cleaner, which are
required to transport the sand to the specific area for disposal.
164
Fig.3.90 Relation between depth ratio of before and after

hydraulic jump, Froude No., and gradient on slope

There is some possibility to control grain size to be taken by
design of intake, and settlement basin. Observation tells us that,
it is necessary to consider to arrange settling basin. In case of
settling basin, grain size is defined by inflow velocity at intake
which is defined by intake design.
(2) Protection of bank and major bed

In constructing a weir, bank protection may be required to prevent
erosion of the banks or dikes for a certain section of the river. Major
bed (Flood plane) protection may also be required to prevent erosion.
1) Protection of transition and dike

Discharge and flow direction may change due to construction of a
weir. Protection works of riverbed, minor bed, major bed and river
bank may be necessary against these changes. Protection of the
riverbed is mentioned in the Section of 3.2.3. Other protection works
165
are mentioned below.
(a) Protection work of transition

The upstream edge of transition protection should be the upper end
compared with 10m upstream from the upstream side apron and 5m
upstream from the upstream side riverbed protection. The
downstream edge of transition protection should be the lower end
compared with 15m downstream from the downstream side apron
and 5m downstream from the downstream side riverbed protection.
This protection work section is divided into two parts, an apron
protection part and a riverbed protection part. Further protection of
up- and down-stream river bank in this section may be necessary.
When a weir is designed at a curved section of the river, transition
protection should be extended further than the distances mentioned
above at the downstream side. Bank protection height is higher than
design flood level (freeboard 0.5～0.6m) or as high as original river
bank height.
a)Apron part of bank protection

This part of protection covers the section between piers and both
side apron and is also called transition retaining wall. The wall must
have vertical front surface lest there should be any problem when
overflowing water comes down from top of gates of from fixed portion
of the weir directly to the slope of bank protection. Generally, the
wall is to be a reinforced concrete wall or concrete gravity wall. When
watertightness is necessary at both sides of the weir, water seal is
required at joints between the walls and aprons.
b) Riverbed protection part of bank protection

This part of protection covers the rest of bank protection. It must
employ the same structure as above or joint structure of slope
protection work and foundations. Foot protection, which is required
for river structure is involved in bed protection work in this case,
hence foot protection is required at both side of the ends of bed
protection. For both cases, the depth of foot protection has to be
studied considering the erosion condition of the river. Deep foot
protection or sheet piles must be adopted to make structures stable.
Genellay the depth of foot protection is adopted 0.5m to 1.5m. Bank
166
protection height is as high as original river bank height when

transitive bank protection is constructed at the minor bed slope.
Wing width on major bed is 1 to 2m for a standard case. When the
protection is constructed adjacent to a fixed weir, wing width must
be wider according to the flow condition. Fig. 3.91 shows the general
shape of bank protections. If the protection employs reinforced
concrete structures, concrete cover on reinforcement bars must be
thick enough.
(b) Bank protection with dike

Bank protection with dike is divided into two cases, one of which is
that transition bank protection covers the function of dike
protection, when a weir is installed at the single sectional river. The
other case is that dike protection is required independently; when
the weir is installed at the minor bed section of a multi-section-river.
For the former case, the structure must follow the basic standard
mentioned in Paragraph (a). For the latter case, the protection area
is decided according to the agreement between the authority and the
river controller. In this case, when the distance between river bank
and the nearest pier is large, this protection might not be required.
Height of this protection is to be higher than or at least equal to the
design high water level. When weir is installed at the bending part of
the river, the height is to be as high as the dike top.
2) Major bed protection

The parts where major bed protection is
necessary are;
① around piers and downstream
major bed from piers,
② upper portion of the section
between inlet and sluice way and
both side of connection conduit,
③ upper portion of cut-off wall
when a weir is installed in a
multi-section-river and
④ upper portion of wing walls
which are installed on both banks.
Protection ,work is decided Fig.3.2.91 Prote ction of transit ion
and dike
167
according to the river scale and structure of the weir. Roughness

of the protection surface is preferred to be as same as that of the
riverbed.

This item should be designed according to the design flood level.
Refer to 3.1.4(4).
3.2.9 Control Facilities

Control facilities have to be installed to operate and maintain intake
facilities and related structures and to facilitate intake of the design
discharge reliably and to flush the flood discharge safely.
(1) Operation equipment

Operation equipment must be selected and installed so as to meet
the requirements for smooth operation of all the facilities

It is necessary to consider safety of the operator such as walking
slab to operate gates.
(2) Power receiving and distributing facilities

The power receiving and distributing facilities are installed to
receive electric power from the power source available at the site and
to distribute it properly to the respective loads. The power supply
conditions such as reliability of service and voltage fluctuation
range should be considered on planning and design of the facilities.

Don’t forget to make small-scale irrigation gates to be manually
operated with relative ease and safety.
(3) Operation and maintenance bridge

1) An operation and maintenance bridge is installed for safety
operation and maintenance of a facility and must have a safety
structure.
The operation & maintenance bridge is a kind of bridge which is
168
installed as an access facility to a control house or so to operate the

facilities. It may be installed over piers to carry gate operating
equipment. Steel, prestressed concrete and reinforced concrete are
materials used for bridges. The width of it must fulfill the needs of
operation and maintenance as well as of special operation in an
emergency.
2) Span
The span of the operation bridge is decided after considering river
section, flow direction, features and its economical performance.
3) Location of abutment
(a) An abutment of bridge must not be installed within the flow
section of the river in the following three (3) cases when installed on
the bank of a river (or on the dikes if a sectional shape is designed).
The three cases are ;
① width of the river is more than 50m,
② installing bridge is within the .back water section and
③ installing bridge is within tidal zone of the river (see Fig. 3.92).
Fig. 3.92 Relation between abutment, dike, and river bank
(b) When abutments are installed in banks or dikes in the section of

the river except the cases mentioned above, the abutments must not
be erected inside the slope of the banks or dikes (see Fig. 3.92).
(c) Abutments must be installed in parallel with the top-of--slope
169
line. If impossible, special treatment is required to avoid extreme

hindrance to the structure of the bank or dike (see Fig. 3.93).
Fig. 3.93 Fig. 3.94

Example of arrangement of Position of bottom of abutment
abutment of which surface
is oblique to the alignment
of dike
(d) Foundations installed in banks or dikes must be founded on firm

ground (see Fig. 3.94).
4) The beam seat height(operation slab)

The beam seat height must be decided considering the operation
height of the gate of the movable portion of the weir, wave height and
safety clearance.
(4) Other operation facilities

Warning equipment, visual and audio detection, lighting, data
processing, and trash-raking systems may be installed if necessary.

It is better to construct simple trash-racking systems like screen
and stand for taking trash by human power to reduce its cost.
(5) Operation
Proper operation are necessary for ordinary and flood cases to
maintain the weir's function to intake and release design discharge.
1) Intake operation
Intake operation must be executed to draw the required discharge,
prevent sand from flowing into the canals and to avoid causing
170
obstruction to the third parties. Drawing the required water is the

first priority. Appropriate operation of gates, maintenance of
scouring sluice and prevention of sand inflow are required for the
purposes. The following points must be considered.
(a) Gate operation must meet fluctuation of river discharge and
intake discharge. It is appropriate to operate the intake gate to
keep the water level at pondage during operation. Scouring sluice
gate(s) is required to regulate water level and an automatic
control devices of the sluice gate. Discharge from bottom
discharge type gate is smaller than the one from overflow type
gate at the same opening in both cases. Namely, precise
discharge control for water level regulation by the former type is
more difficult than the latter one. The wider the gate, the bigger
this difficulty becomes due to the bigger deflection of the gate.
Thus, when a flap gate is installed, additionally an appropriate
operation is required to maximize the function of the flap gate.
(b) When introducing an automatic operation system, precise
detection of water level and discharge is necessary, and the
function of the detection system must be checked for its
sensitivity.
(c) For maintaining the function of the scouring sluice, deposited
sand in the scouring sluice must be removed and a clear water
way must be maintained. Continuous monitoring of the
conditions of depositing and timely removal of the sand are
necessary. Especially when a flood is abating, an appropriate
gate operation is required since functioning of the scouring sluice
depends on the discharge.
(d) If sand deposition or sand dune is growing in the scouring sluice
and, therefore, degradation of the function of the scouring sluice
is expected, deposited sand must be removed off shortly.
(e) In general, gate operation during an abating flood starts with the
spillway gate at the opposite side to the inlet, then works across
to the scouring sluice. The reverse order of operations may be
selected considering conditions of movement of the sand.
(f) A special operation not to cause big fluctuation of water level in
front of the inlet is required if the height difference between inlet
apron and scouring sluice base is small.
(g) Owing to the deposition on the scouring sluice, the flow section of
171
the scouring sluice is constricted and several malfunctions such

as obstruction of water flow, and enlargement of sand grain size
by increasing of inflow velocity, etc. are induced. To avoid such
malfunctions, it is necessary to minimize water level fluctuation
and prevent vortical inflow front of the inlet. Smooth and quirk
operation of gates are also required to prevent sand deposition in
front of the inlet during flooding.
(h) Trash or other matter which is caught within the gate guide frame
or screen when flooding must be excluded as soon as possible.
(i) Continuous monitoring of the condition of sand deposition in the
settling basin is required for timely flushing the sand. Flushing
must be avoided at the peak irrigation stage and should be
executed when the irrigation requirement is small
(j) Sand deposition at the outlet of the flushing pipe has to be
removed off for maintaining the function.
2) Flood time operation .

Prevention of decreasing cross-sectional area of the river and
protection of joint parts of weir and dike must be considered for the
operation while flooding.
(a) Detection of discharge change of the rivers by systematic

observation is necessary for preparation of suitable and quick
operation of gates against floods.
(b) Decrease of cross-sectional area of the river must be avoided and
the water level must be kept less than the design high water level
by suitable operation of gates.
(c) When releasing of water from gates is necessary, care has to be
taken for river bank protection or riverbed protection from
erosion owing to change of flow line.
(d) An operation manual for gates is prepared for training on
operations, which is necessary for correct understanding about
the manual
3) Operation and maintenance of the facilities

Checking and monitoring of functions of the facilities are required
for operation and maintenance. The following items must be
considered for the purposes.
172
(a) Operation and maintenance of fixed portion

a) The upstream riverbed tends to be scoured when flooding if the
weir is constructed on permeable foundations. If the scour
depth becomes lower than the weirs foundation level, stability
of the weir will be jeopardized. By continuous and timely
detection, an upstream apron may be constructed additionally
if necessary.
b) Uplift force is working at the downstream side of the weir along
foundation line of the weir body or of the downstream apron.
Breaking of the water stop may cause piping at construction
joints. Piping is one of the most serious problems for stability
of a weir body and must be repaired when found. Repair of
piping comes more difficult near the center of the body. A
popular method of repairing of piping is grouting. Research of
water pressure and ground conditions is required before
repair.
c) Uplift force is usually designed to be cancelled at the
downstream end of apron. If there is a greater uplift force than
designed, which means a shorter creep length than designed, a
treatment to lengthen the creep length is required.
d) If rolling rocks are expected at the site, monitoring of wear on
the top of the weir body and of the apron and proper repair are
required.
e) The joint between apron and riprap is also a transition of
roughness structurally and turbulence of flow may happens
near the joint. Monitoring of scour by soil uptake by vortical
flow and proper treatment are required.
f) The length of riprap is designed longer than the anticipated
hydraulic jump length. However, since the hydraulic jump may
happen downstream from the riprap by chance, monitoring of
the locations of hydraulic jump and proper treatment such as
extension or increasing roughness of the riprap are required.
g) Monitoring of the scour condition at the joint between the
riprap and unprotected river bed. Since complete prevention of
scour there is almost impossible, necessity for repair or
extension of riprap is decided from consideration of the
monitored results as to scour speed and depth at and around
the joint.
173
(b) Operation and maintenance of movable part of weir

a) Operation and maintenance of the apron, Joints between apron
and riprap, and joints between riprap and unprotected river
bed must follow the directions mentioned above in the section
on operation and maintenance of fixed weir.
b) Since the apron connected to the movable part and scouring
sluice may be significantly worn, monitoring and proper repair
are required.
c) Gates must be re-painted every 3 - 5 years for rust protection.
Cables and motors must be monitored and lubricated to the
required parts for safe operation.
d) The oil volume and pressure conditions must be monitored
continuously for an inflation weir with hydraulic operator. A
packing for the water seal may become significantly worn and
must be replaced at intervals as necessary.
(c) Revetment
a) Since the scouring sluice is usually installed at the lowest
elevation of a natural riverbed, the flood may be concentrated
there and flood energy may carry its effect further downstream
than expected and a revetment there may be damaged.
Revetment beside the thalweg must be designed with care.
b) The contact line of piers or the fixed weir body with the riprap
may be one of the weak points and must be designed with care.

For discharging the sediment in front of intake and keeping water
way open, it is necessary to open the gate of scouring sluice. It is
necessary to check the situation of sediment especially after
flood.
174
4. DATA SHEET, CHECK LIST AND OTHERS
4.1 Data Sheet

Data sheet is effective method to understand easily the headwork
design information. It helps not only for the person in charge of the
headwork design but also for other officers participating. It can be
used for checking design, explanation, and database management.
Format and example of the data sheet is shown below:
175
Format of data sheet
176
Example of the data sheet
177
4.2 Check List

The check list is one of the effective methods to prevent oversight
and mistake while designing. It makes the condition of designing
easily understandable.
With the present’s situation some of the investigation and design
procedures can’t be exercised due to the problem of cost and
equipment. These necessary matters can be done during
construction phase. It is not necessary to check all of the item before
construction. There are necessary item that should be checked at
construction time. Therefore, check lists are made separately one for
before construction and the other for construction time.
The format of the check lists are in the next pages.
When the answer is “yes”, check into □. And fill in the necessary
information. Some of the item is not necessary isn’t to be checked
according to each situation of the project.
178
Design check list (before construction) (1/4)

Item(s) Contents Check Remark
Rainfall data Annual Maximum daily rainfall □ ～

Annual Minimum daily rainfall □ ～
Annual daily rainfall □ ～
Survey Topographic survey □
Longitudinal survey □ Km
Cross-section survey □ section
Survey for temporary works □

Collection of topographic map □
River Discharge data How to get
(Discharge condition, Long-term records of river discharge □
water level and Run-off analysis from rain fall data □
discharge) Measuring the flow □
Collecting information from local community □
Term of data ～
Sediment data How to get
Measuring □
Observation □
Term of data ～
Condition of riverbed How to get
(condition of thalweg, Measuring □
riverbed slope) Observation □
(river bed material) Measuring □
Observation □
Flood control plan If there is flood □
Situation of drainage Data is collected
Upstream □
Downstream □
Dikes, Bridge and Data is collected □
other structures
Present condition of Data on current situation of river □
river water utilization water utilization from other sector is
collected
179

Item(s) Contents Check Remark
Foundation How to investigate

Drilling □
Test pitting □
Observation □
Bearing test by standard □
penetration test
Bearing test by Loading test □
Investigation on river deposit □
Ground water investigation □
Investigation for Meteorology □
construction works Surface water □
Ground water □
Riverbed conditions □
Construction equipment □
Construction material(cement) □
Construction material(gravel) □
Construction material(sand) □
Construction material(stone for □
masonry)
Transportation system □
Electric source □
Other Environmental Impact assessment □
Design water intake Maximum design discharge □
discharge Measurement test □
Design intake water There is consideration for irrigation □
level area
There is consideration for protecting □
flowing of sediment.
Design flood discharge How to achieve
Run-off analysis □
Flood mark □
Capacity of river □
There is Safety factor □
There is probability analysis □ /
Design flood level It is calculated from design flood □
discharge
Study of riverbed Riverbed slope □
evolution Riverbed material □
Riverbed condition □
180

Item (s) Contents Check Remark
Position of ・Availability of a stable thalweg close □
Headworks to the bank at the proposed
position of water intake,
・Sufficient water intake must be □
feasible even during the dry
season,
・Least sediment inflow during water □
intake,
・Least effect of weir construction on □
up and downstream,
・Stability of the structure can be □
achieved with economical
construction costs,
・Convenient for operation and □
maintenance.
Method of water Natural intake □

intake Intake by weir constructed to □
maintain a constant water level
Position of intake The position of the intake can ensure □
flushing of sediment and easy
maintenance of the thalweg,
One side intake, □
Both side intake □
Type of weir Fixed type □
Floating type □
Creep Length Creep length is considered □
Elevation of weir It is enough height
crest 1m difference between inlet and □
base of scouring sluice,
Intake height, □
10cm head loss margin □
Study of possible There is □
effect on the river
control of upstream
Scouring sluice There is off take discharge, maximum □
flood discharge
Spillway There is maximum flood discharge, □
dimensions of the spillway
Pier There is interval, separate foundation □
Weir stability Overturning ok □
Sliding ok □
Settlement ok □
Stress analysis ok □
181

Item Content Check Remark
Apron Check the following
Thickness is enough, □
The monolithic construction of apron □
and weir for creep length at floating
type
The reinforcement bar is put in □
bottom slab for protecting
destruction at floating type
Riprap It is
Length is calculated by guideline □
Size of riprap materials □
Foundation work The allowable bearing capacity of the □
foundation is bigger than contact
pressure
Upstream and Creep length is enough □
downstream Cut-off
wall
Inlet 1m difference between inlet and base □
of scouring sluice,
Inflow velocity is smaller than 1.0m/s □
Approach velocity is smaller than □
0.4m/s
Gate Consider gates that are not bending □
Consider gates that are not heavy for □
operation by human
Wing wall It has enough height □
It has enough stability □
Settling basin Sediment load has to be known □
The design is done by guideline □
Protection of bank It has enough capacity □
Operation Stand There is enough space and safety □
182
Design check list (At construction term) (1/1)

Item Contents Check Remark
Survey Longitudinal survey(bed rock) □
Cross-section survey (bed rock) □
Survey for temporary works □
(additional)
Sediment data How to get
Measuring sediment load □
Observation □
(condition of thalweg, Measuring □
river slope) Observation □
(river bed material) Measuring □
Observation □
Foundation How to investigate
Drilling □
Test pitting □
Observation □
Bearing test by standard □
penetration test
Bearing test by Loading test □
Investigation on river deposit □
Ground water (subsurface) □
investigation
Other Environmental impact assessment □
(hydrology, salinity, etc)
Weir stability(bed Overturning ok □
lock elevation will be Sliding ok □
changed) Settlement ok □
Stress analysis ok □
Foundation work(bed The allowable bearing capacity of the □
lock elevation will be foundation is bigger than contact
changed) pressure
Wing wall(bed lock It has enough height □
elevation will be It has enough stability □
changed)
183
4.3 Coefficients of Roughness (1/3)
Lining, retaining walls, tunnels, culverts, siphons, and aqueducts

Coefficient of roughness
Materials and conditions of canals Minimum Standard Maximum
value value value
Concrete (cast-in place flume, 0.012 0.015 0.016
culvert, etc.)
Concrete (shotcrete ) 0.016 0.019 0.023
Concrete (with precast flume, pipe, 0.012 0.014 0.016
etc.)
Concrete (reinforced concrete pipe ) 0.011 0.013 0.014
Concrete block masonry 0.014 0.016 0.017
Cement (mortar) 0.011 0.013 0.015
Asbestos cement pipe 0.011 0.013 0.014
Steel (locked bar or welded ) 0.010 0.012 0.014
Steel (rivet ) 0.013 0.016 0.017
Smooth steel surface ( not painted) 0.011 0.012 0.014
Smooth steel surface and pipe 0.012 0.013 0.017
(painted)
Corrugated surface (steel sheet ) 0.021 0.025 0.030
Cast iron (not painted) 0.011 0.014 0.016
Cast iron sheet and pipe (painted) 0.010 0.013 0.014
Chloride vinyl pipe 0.012
Reinforced plastic 0.012
Ceramic pipe 0.011 0.014 0.017
Earth lining 0.025
Asphalt (smooth surface ) 0.014
Asphalt (rough stone ) 0.017
Masonry (rough stone wet masonry) 0.017 0.025 0.030
Masonry (rough stone dry masonry) 0.023 0.032 0.035
Wood (wooden gutter ) 0.010 0.012 0.014
Wood (lined in thin layer, treated 0.015 0.017 0.020
with creosote )
Rock tunnel with no lining on overall 0.030 0.035 0.040
cross-section area
Rock tunnel with no lining except 0.020 0.025 0.030
concrete placed on the bottom
Vegetation coverage (sodding ) 0.030 0.040 0.050
184
Canals constructed by excavation or dredging

value value value
Earthen canals, uniform and straight
1) No weeds (immediately after 0.016 0.018 0.020
completion of the canal )
2) No weeds (after the canal has been 0.018 0.022 0.025
exposed to weather )
3) Gravel (no weeds) 0.022 0.025 0.030
4) Few weeds with short grasses 0.022 0.027 0.033
Earthen canals, non-uniform and
curved
1) No vegetation coverage 0.023 0.025 0.030
2) Some weeds 0.025 0.030 0.033
3) Dense growth of weeds or water 0.030 0.035 0.040
weeds
4) The bottom is earth and the side 0.028 0.030 0.035
walls are covered by rubble stones
5) The bottom is covered by stones, 0.025 0.035 0.040
and the side walls are covered by
weeds
6) The bottom is covered by cobble 0.030 0.040 0.050
stones, and the side walls have no
weed
Drag line excavation and dredging
1) No vegetation coverage 0.025 0.028 0.033
2) Some shrubs on shore 0.030 0.050 0.060
Rock excavation
1) Smooth and uniform 0.025 0.035 0.040
2) Irregular 0.035 0.040 0.050
185
Natural flow canals

value value value
Small canals on flat land
1) N o w e e d a n d s t r a i g h t . N o 0.025 0.030 0.033
fracture or deep water spot
when the high-water level is
reached
2) S a m e a s a b o v e , b u t a l o t o f 0.030 0.035 0.040
stones and weeds
3) N o w e e d , b u t m e a n d e r i n g . 0.033 0.040 0.045
Some shoals and deep water
spots
4) Same as a b o v e , b u t s o m e 0.035 0.045 0.050
stones and weeds
5) S a m e a s a b o v e , b u t l o w - w a t e r 0.040 0.048 0.055
level and few changes in
slopes and cross sections
6) S a m e a s t h e l i n e i t e m 4 0.045 0.050 0.060
above, but more stones
7) We e d s a n d d e e p s p o t s i n m i l d 0.050 0.070 0.080
flow sections
8) S e c t i o n w i t h t h i c k v e g e t a t i o n 0.075 0.100 0.115
of weed. Many deep water
spots and trees
Canal in mountainous land, no
plant in the canal. River banks
a r e s t e e p . Tr e e s a n d s h r u b s
along river banks are immersed
in the water when the
high-water level is reached.
1) R i v e r b e d i s c o v e r e d b y c o b b l e 0.030 0.040 0.050
stones and gravels.
2) R i v e r b e d i s c o v e r e d b y l a r g e 0.040 0.050 0.070
cobble stones
Large canals
1) Regular cross section without 0.025 0.060
large cobble stones or shrubs
2) Irregular and rough cross section 0.035 0.100
186
5. EXAMPLE OF DESIGN FOR HEADWORKS
This Chapter shows an example of crucial data and calculation for basic
design of headworks. In case of actual design, designer must follow the
contents of this Chapter.
5.1 Basic Design Input Data (Chapter2)
5.1.1 Discharge through Float Measurement Method (Chapter2.1.1(2)2))
According to the river discharge measurement data, the calculation table

can be made.
Example;
Measurement date 26 / 12 / 2012
Area Velocity Discharge
Measurement point Measuring L t Velocity V
Position Q(m3/s)
W(m) D(m) A(m2) line (m) (s) coefficient (m/s)
Left side of - - - No.1 10 12.99 0.85 0.66 0.079
river bank
1 0.2 0.05 0.005 No.2 12.58
2 0.2 0.09 0.014 No.3 13.10
3 0.2 0.12 0.021 No.4 12.81
4 0.2 0.12 0.024 No.5 12.95
5 0.2 0.12 0.024
6 0.2 0.1 0.022
Right side 0.2 0 0.01
of river
bank
Total 1.4 0.12 Ave 12.89

.
River discharge = 0.12 x 0.66 = 0.079m3/s = 79l/s
Refer to Excel format guide 1 for the details.
187
Excel format guide 1. Float measurement method
#Please input data into yellow cell.
Measurement date 26 / 12 / 2012
Area Velocity Discharge
Position Measurement point Measuring line L(m) t(s) Velocity V(m/s) Q(m3/s)
W(m) D(m) A(m2) coefficient
Left side of river bank ‐ ‐ ‐ No.1 10 12.99 0.85 0.66 0.079
1 0.2 0.05 0.005 No.2 12.58
2 0.2 0.09 0.014 No.3 13.10
3 0.2 0.12 0.021 No.4 12.81
4 0.2 0.12 0.024 No.5 12.95
5 0.2 0.12 0.024
6 0.2 0.1 0.022
Right side of river bank 0.2 0 0.01
188
Total 1.4 0.12 Ave. 12.89

5.1.2 Riverbed Slope (Chapter2.1.2(2))
According to the river slope survey data, the calculation table can be made.
Example;
River slope survey data
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Accumulative
Station Distance Elevation Area
No. Height
No. L(m) H(m) A(m2)
H(m)
0 0+000 0 2418.664 0 0
1 0+020 20 2419.42 0.756 7.56
2 0+040 20 2419.608 0.944 17
3 0+060 20 2419.637 0.973 19.17
4 0+080 20 2420.472 1.808 27.81
5 0+100 20 2422.702 4.038 58.46
6 0+120 20 2423.664 5 90.38
7 0+140 20 2423.275 4.611 96.11
8 0+160 20 2422.548 3.884 84.95
9 0+180 20 2423.762 5.098 89.82
10 0+200 20 2423.15 4.486 95.84
11 0+213.07 13.07 2423.681 5.017 62.10
Total 213.07 649.20
Havg = 2 x ∑A / ∑L = 2 x 649.20 / 213.07 = 6.09m

I (slope) avg = Havg / ∑L = 6.09 / 213.07 = 0.029 = 1/35
The result of calculation, average of river slope = 0.029 = 1/35
189
Excel format guide 2. Average River slope
Accumulative
Station Distance Elevation Area
No. Height
No. L(m) H(m) A(m2)
H(m)
0 0+000 0 2418.664 0 0
1 0+020 20 2419.42 0.756 7.56
2 0+040 20 2419.608 0.944 17
3 0+060 20 2419.637 0.973 19.17
4 0+080 20 2420.472 1.808 27.81
5 0+100 20 2422.702 4.038 58.46
6 0+120 20 2423.664 5 90.38
7 0+140 20 2423.275 4.611 96.11
8 0+160 20 2422.548 3.884 84.95
9 0+180 20 2423.762 5.098 89.82
10 0+200 20 2423.15 4.486 95.84
11 0+213.07 13.07 2423.681 5.017 62.10
Total 213.07 649.20
Havg = 2∑A/∑L = 6.09 m

I (slope) avg = Havg /∑L = 0.029
= 1/35
190
5.2 Basic Design (Chapter3.1)
5.2.1 Design Water Intake Discharge (Chapter3.1.1(1))
(1) In case of getting discharge data in or near river basin of project site
1) Data collection
In or near river discharge data on project site is collected from Ministry of
Water, Irrigation and Energy, etc. It is better to have more than ten years
data. Based on these data, the latest ten years data can be used.
2) Selection of reference year

Based on 1) data, reference year occurred minimum discharge in ten years
is selected.
Example;
Take minimum discharge of each year.
Year Minimum Date Remark
discharge (m3/s)
2004 1.50 2 January
2005 1.65 5 December
2006 1.46 23 December
2007 2.02 12 January
2008 1.80 5 January
2009 1.42 25 December ←Reference year
2010 1.55 28 December
2011 1.62 15 December
2012 1.49 20 January
2013 1.52 10 December
The year which is occurred minimum discharge in ten years is 2009.
3) Selection of standard base flow

Based on the reference year data, standard base flow (355/365 days
discharge (Ds)) is selected.
Example;
Reference year: 2009
Take small discharge from minimum to 11th value of 2009’s data
Ranking Discharge (m3/s) Date Remark
1 1.42 25 December
2 1.43 24 December
3 1.45 26 December
191
4 1.45 23 December
5 1.45 22 December
6 1.50 27 December
7 1.53 21 December
8 1.55 28 December
9 1.55 29 December
10 1.56 30 December
11 1.58 20 December ←355/365 days
discharge
The standard base flow is 1.58m3/s in 20 December.
4) Calculation of base flow at the point of intake

Based on the data of river basin and catchment area of the project, base
flow at the point of intake is calculated.
Example; River basin (Ar) is 1000km2 from delineation

Catchment area of the project (Ap) is 50Km2 from delineation
Base flow (D) is calculated by watershed ratio method.

D = Ds × Ap / Ar = 1.58 × 50 / 1000 = 0.079m3/s
5) Calculation of the amount of usable water

Based on base flow, the amount of usable water is calculated.
W = D × 0.8 = 0.079 × 0.8 = 0.063m3/s
(2) In case of getting discharge data by actual measurement
1) Data collection
Refer to 2.1.1(2) and 5.1.1
2) Making consecutive discharge data

Based on 1) data, it makes the consecutive discharge data of ten years by
tank model. Refer to “Guideline for Irrigation Master Plan Study Preparation
on Surface Water Resources” for the detail.
3) Selection of reference year

Refer to 5.2.1(1)2)
192
4) Selection of standard base flow

Refer to 5.2.1(1)3)
5) Calculation of base flow at the point of intake

Refer to 5.2.1(1)4)
6) Calculation of the amount of usable water

Based on base flow, the amount of usable water is calculated.
The existing design water intake discharge in the downstream of the project
Qdw = 0.01m3/s (This value can be obtained from previous design document
and site investigation.)
W = D × 0.8 – Qdw
= 0.079 × 0.8 – 0.01
= 0.053m3/s
5.2.2 Design Intake Water Level (Chapter3.1.1(2), 3.1.4(1), 3.2.6)
(1) Water level of the field at the highest elevation of the irrigation area
The field level at the highest elevation of the irrigation area + irrigation water
depth on the farmland = EL.2420.5m + 0.05m = EL.2420.55m
(2) Water level at the starting point of the main canal

- Canal length from the starting point of the main canal to the starting point
of the irrigation area (the highest elevation of the irrigation area) = 1300m
- Canal slope (assumption) = 1/1000 ← It can be changed after decided
canal slope if necessary. And it must be calculated again as everything
below.
- Necessary water head = 1300×1/1000 = 1.3m
- Water level at the starting point of the main canal = Water level of the field
at the highest elevation of the irrigation area + Necessary water head =
EL.2420.55m + 1.3m = EL.2421.85m
(3) The hydraulic loss between the intake and the starting point of the
main canal
There is no structure in this design but this loss assumed 0.1m for safety.
193
(4) Other structural losses at the intake (hydraulic loss of entrance)
1) Inlet sill
The inlet elevation prefers to be 1.0m higher than scouring sluice sill and
also prefers to be more than 1/6 of maximum flood depth of the river from
the riverbed for prevention of sand. But in case of small head weir, a
minimum inlet elevation is at least 0.5m higher than scouring sluice sill.
If the height from scouring sluice sill to inlet elevation is lower than 1.0m,
settling basin should be considered.
(a) Scouring sluice sill

It adopts the elevation of river bed level as the elevation of scouring sluice
sill.
Inlet sill ≥ Scouring sluice sill (EL.2420.5m) + more than 1m = more than
EL. 2421.5m …… (See 3.2.6(3)1))
(b) Maximum flood depth of the river…… (See 5.2.4)

- Maximum flood depth of the river = Design flood level – Riverbed level
= EL. 2424.82m – EL. 2420.5m = 4.32m
∴ Inlet sill ≥ 1/6 of maximum flood depth of the river

= Riverbed level + 4.32m × 1/6
= EL. 2420.5m + 0.72 = EL. 2421.22m
As the comparison of (a) and (b), inlet sill ≥ EL. 2421.5m
2) Intake size and hydraulic loss of entrance

B = Q / h1 × V ……… (See 3.2.6(3)3))
At the time, 0.6 ≤ Intake velocity (V) ≤ 1.0m/s ……… (See 3.2.6 (3)2))
Approach velocity (Va) ≤ 0.4m/s ……… (See 3.2.6 (3)2))
⊿ he = he + V22 / 2g - V12 / 2g = fe × V22 / 2g + V22 / 2g - V12 / 2g

……… (See 3.2.6(5)1))
(this case, V12 = 0m/s)
By using the above two formula, it calculates ⊿ he, B and h1 by trial and
error calculation. Refer to Excel format guide 3 for the detail.
The result of calculation, intake size is B=0.4m, H=0.25m
So, hydraulic loss of entrance (⊿ he) = 0.045m
194
Excel format guide 3. Intake size (In the case of diversion weir)
#Please input data into yellow cell
#The input data of green cell is the value assumed yourself. (Goal seek "By changing cell")
#Blue cell is the "set sell" for Goal seek. "to value" = 0
①Design intake discharge (Q) = 0.063 m3/s When ⑫,⑭ and ⑯ is OK, select the smallest

②Difference between inlet sill and base of scouring sluice = 1.25 m ←At first this value is assump on. area of ④ x ⑤
③Head loss coefficient of inlet (fe) = 0.5
This value is assumption
↓ ↓ ↓Goal seek "By changing cell" ↓Goal seek ("set sell". "to value" = 0)
Inlet width Water depth Head loss Water depth Check assumption of Head loss Intake velocity Approach velocity
(Inflow) (After Inflow) Calculation (After inflow)
Difference between eachᇞhe Result
B(m) h1(m) ᇞhe(m) h2(m) A1(m2) A2(m2) V2(m/s) ᇞhe(m) 0.6≤V2≤1.0(m/s) Va≤0.4
④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦=⑤‐⑥ ⑧=④×⑤ ⑨=④×⑦ ⑩=①/⑨ ⑪=③×⑩2/2g+⑩2/2g ‐0.01≤⑥‐⑪ ≤ 0.01 ⑫OK or NG ⑬=①/⑨ ⑭OK or NG ⑮=①÷((②+⑤)×④) ⑯OK or NG
0.4 0.2 0.282 ‐0.082 0.08 ‐0.033 ‐1.919 0.282 0.0001 ←Goal seek OK ‐1.92 NG 0.11 OK
0.4 0.25 0.045 0.205 0.10 0.082 0.768 0.045 ‐0.0002 ←Goal seek OK 0.77 OK 0.11 OK Select
0.4 0.3 0.025 0.275 0.12 0.110 0.573 0.025 ‐0.0001 ←Goal seek OK 0.57 NG 0.10 OK
0.45 0.2 0.274 ‐0.074 0.09 ‐0.033 ‐1.891 0.274 0.0004 ←Goal seek OK ‐1.89 NG 0.10 OK
0.45 0.25 0.031 0.219 0.11 0.099 0.639 0.031 ‐0.0003 ←Goal seek OK 0.64 OK 0.09 OK
0.45 0.3 0.019 0.281 0.14 0.126 0.498 0.019 0.0000 ←Goal seek OK 0.50 NG 0.09 OK
0.5 0.2 0.267 ‐0.067 0.10 ‐0.034 ‐1.871 0.268 ‐0.0006 ←Goal seek OK ‐1.87 NG 0.09 OK
0.5 0.25 0.024 0.226 0.13 0.113 0.558 0.024 0.0002 ←Goal seek OK 0.56 NG 0.08 OK
0.5 0.3 0.015 0.285 0.15 0.143 0.442 0.015 0.0000 ←Goal seek OK 0.44 NG 0.08 OK
195
0.5 0.35 0.011 0.339 0.18 0.170 0.372 0.011 0.0004 ←Goal seek OK 0.37 NG 0.08 OK
0.5 0.4 0.008 0.392 0.20 0.196 0.321 0.008 0.0001 ←Goal seek OK 0.32 NG 0.08 OK
0.000 0.00 0.000 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! ←Goal seek #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
<Confirmation calculation > Design discharge
Q = m * B * h0 * √ ( 2 * g * ( h1 ‐ h0 / 2 ) ) = 0.101741 m3/s > 0.063 m3/s OK

①m= 0.65
②B= 0.4
③h0= 0.25
④h1= 0.25
3) Confirmation calculation
Q = m × B × h0 × √ ( 2 × g × ( h1 - h0 / 2 ) )
= 0.65 × 0.4 × 0.25 × √ ( 2 × 9.8 × ( 0.25 – 0.25 / 2 ) )

= 0.102 m3/s > 0.063 m3/s OK ……… (See 3.2.6(4)2))
(5) Calculation result of design water intake level

The result of above calculations, design water intake level is decided as
follows.
Design water intake level = (2) + (3) + (4) = Water level at the starting point of
the main canal + The hydraulic loss between the intake and the starting
point of the main canal + hydraulic loss of entrance = EL.2421.85m + 0.1m
+ 0.045m = EL.2421.995m ≈ EL.2422.0m
According to above elevation,

Inlet sill = EL.2422m – 0.25m
= EL.2421.75m
According to (4)1)(b) in this Chapter,

Inlet sill = EL.2421.75m ≥ EL.2421.5m OK
So, the difference between inlet sill and base of scouring sluice
= Inlet sill (EL.2421.75m) - Scouring sluice sill (EL.2420.5m)
= 1.25m
Based on this value, the approach velocity can be calculated again using
Excel format guide 3. The result of calculation, Approach velocity is OK.
Design water intake level = EL. 2422m
Intake 0.25m
EL. 2421.75m
0.4m
1.25m
EL. 2420.5m
196
5.2.3 Design Flood Discharge (Chapter3.1.1(3))
(1) In case of getting past flood discharge data in or near river basin of
project site
1) Data collection of in or near river discharge on project site from Ministry

of Water, Irrigation and Energy, etc. It is better to have within 50 years data.
2) Based on the data, select the biggest discharge.

Example;
From 1984 to 2013 (30 years)
Take maximum discharge of each year.
Year Maximum discharge (m3/s) Date Remark
1984 1002 2 August
1985 986 5 July
1986 1100 23 July
1987 856 12 July
1988 1251 10 August
1989 1332 25 July
1990 1233 28 July
1991 1498 15 July
1992 1765 20 August ←Flood discharge
1993 1562 10 July
1994 1489 12 August
1995 989 5 August
1996 1085 12 July
1997 1269 29 July
1998 889 8 August
1999 1574 16 July
2000 1632 14 August
2001 1096 10 July
2002 1185 19 July
2003 1483 1 August
2004 1084 6 August
2005 1256 12 August
2006 1478 26 July
2007 1365 1 July
2008 1145 5 August
2009 1032 9 July
2010 1096 9 August
2011 1487 20 July
2012 1542 21 August
2013 1638 29 July
The biggest discharge (Qmax) is 1765m3/s in 20 August, 1992.
197
3) Based on the data of river basin and catchment area of the project, flood
discharge at the place of headworks is calculated.
Example; River basin (Ar) is 1000km2 from delineation

Catchment area of the project (Ap) is 50Km2 from delineation
Flood discharge (Qf) is calculated by watershed ratio method
Qf = Qmax × Ap / Ar = 1765 × 50 / 1000 = 88.25m3/s
4) If the river discharge data is less than 50years, design flood discharge (Qd)
is calculated by the value which flood discharge calculated in 3) above
multiplies 1.2 for the safety.
Example; Qd = Qf × 1.2 = 88.25 × 1.2 = 106m3/s
(2) In case of using the maximum flood in the past based on flood mark
or discharge capacity of the river by slope area method
According to the river cross-section survey data, the calculation table and
drawing of cross-section of the river can be made.
Example;
Cross-section survey data

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Accumulated
X Y Distance Elevation Depth
Point ID Distance Remark
(East) (North) (m) (m) (m)
(Width) (m)
Left
RCX 0+00 546325.93 897337.45 0 0 2423.000 0
side
RCX 0+01 546326.099 897337.372 0.19 0.19 2422.944 -0.056
RCX 0+02 546326.969 897336.896 0.99 1.18 2422.628 -0.316
RCX 0+03 546327.699 897336.136 1.05 2.23 2421.483 -1.145
RCX 0+04 546328.423 897335.611 0.89 3.13 2421.278 -0.205
RCX 0+05 546329.219 897335.006 1.00 4.13 2420.934 -0.344
RCX 0+06 546329.971 897334.412 0.96 5.08 2420.297 -0.637
RCX 0+07 546330.011 897334.358 0.07 5.15 2420.304 0.007
RCX 0+08 546331.425 897333.131 1.87 7.02 2419.859 -0.445
River
RCX 0+09 546332.301 897332.664 0.99 8.02 2419.762 -0.097
bed
RCX 0+10 546332.133 897332.966 0.35 8.36 2419.813 0.051
RCX 0+11 546333.411 897332.332 1.43 9.79 2419.974 0.161
RCX 0+12 546334.102 897331.637 0.98 10.77 2420.729 0.755
RCX 0+13 546334.986 897331.269 0.96 11.73 2422.186 1.457
RCX 0+14 546335.21 897331.18 0.24 11.97 2422.500 0.314
Right
RCX 0+15 546335.57 897331.04 0.39 12.35 2423.000 0.500
side
198
Based on above data, rating curve by Manning formula can be made.
Slope = 0.029, Coefficient of Roughness = 0.04

Note ;
Water
Water Wetted Hydraulic area and
Elevation Depth velocity Discharge Wetted
area Perimeter radius Perimeter
(m) (m) (m/s) (m3/s)
(m2) (m) (m) calculated
by Auto
CAD
2419.762 0 0 0 0 0 0
2420 0.238 0.46 3.44 0.13 1.11 0.51
2421 1.238 5.99 7.70 0.78 3.60 21.57
2422 2.238 14.71 11.37 1.29 5.05 74.36
Flood
2422.186 2.424 16.57 11.84 1.40 5.33 88.26 mark
2423 3.238 25.54 14.71 1.74 6.15 157.07
Rating curve
2423.5
2423 2423
2422.5
Elevation(m)
2422.186
2422 2422
2421.5
2421 2421
2420.5
2420 2420
2419.762
2419.5
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170
Discharge(m3/s)
According to the rating curve of this river, the river discharge at the flood
mark (EL. 2422.186m) is 88.26m3/s.
In this case, peak flood should be multiplied 1.2 for safety.
Design flood discharge = Peak flood discharge × 1.2

= 88.26 × 1.2 = 106 m3/s
Refer to Excel format guide 4 for the detail.
199
Excel format guide 4. Rating curve of the river
1. Basic data for making cross‐section of the river
Accumulated
X Y Distance Distance Elevation (Z) Depth Auto CAD
Point ID
(East) (North) (m) (Width) (m) (m) (x,y)
(m)
RCX 0+00 546325.93 897337.45 0 0 2423.000 0 0,0
RCX 0+01 546326.099 897337.372 0.19 0.19 2422.944 ‐0.056 186.131673808933,‐56.00000000004
RCX 0+02 546326.969 897336.896 0.99 1.18 2422.628 ‐0.372 1177.83525856344,‐371.999999999844
RCX 0+03 546327.699 897336.136 1.05 2.23 2421.483 ‐1.517 2231.63789654174,‐1516.99999999983
RCX 0+04 546328.423 897335.611 0.89 3.13 2421.278 ‐1.722 3125.95383619727,‐1722.00000000021
RCX 0+05 546329.219 897335.006 1.00 4.13 2420.934 ‐2.066 4125.77432014416,‐2065.9999999998
RCX 0+06 546329.971 897334.412 0.96 5.08 2420.297 ‐2.703 5084.07489930316,‐2702.99999999997
5151.27608979397,‐2695.99999999991
200
RCX 0+07 546330.011 897334.358 0.07 5.15 2420.304 ‐2.696
RCX 0+08 546331.425 897333.131 1.87 7.02 2419.859 ‐3.141 7023.42058204379,‐3141.00000000008
RCX 0+09 546332.301 897332.664 0.99 8.02 2419.762 ‐3.238 8016.12648005061,‐3237.99999999983
RCX 0+10 546332.133 897332.966 0.35 8.36 2419.813 ‐3.187 8361.71004447078,‐3186.9999999999
RCX 0+11 546333.411 897332.332 1.43 9.79 2419.974 ‐3.026 9788.32842363888,‐3025.99999999984
RCX 0+12 546334.102 897331.637 0.98 10.77 2420.729 ‐2.271 10768.3825038197,‐2271.00000000019
RCX 0+13 546334.986 897331.269 0.96 11.73 2422.186 ‐0.814 11725.9210148732,‐813.999999999851
RCX 0+14 546335.21 897331.18 0.24 11.97 2422.500 ‐0.500 11966.9542075128,‐500

RCX 0+15 546335.57 897331.04 0.39 12.35 2423.000 0.000 12353.2183658214,0

Copy to Auto CAD
<How to make cross‐section by Auto CAD>
1.Open Auto CAD → 2. Turn off Object Snap and Ortho Mode → 3.Copy the low of "Auto CAD"(or column H) → 3. Input PL to commandline in Auto
CAD and push Enter→ Paste the data which copy from Excel file (the part of "Copy to Auto CAD") to comandline in Auto CAD → Push Escap
2423.500
2423.000 2423.000
2422.944 2423.000
2422.628
2422.500 2422.500
2422.186
2422.000
2421.500 2421.483
2421.278
2421.000 2420.934
Elevation(Depth) (m)
2420.729
2420.500
201
2420.304
2420.297
2420.000 2419.974
2419.859 2419.813
2419.762
2419.500
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Distance(Width)(m)

We made drawing of cross‐section of the river using above date by Auto CAD.
2. Discharge of the river
Slope 0.029
Coefficient of Roughness 0.04
Wetted Note ; Water area and
Elevation Depth Water area Hydraulic radius velocity Discharge Wetted
Perimeter Perimeter calculated by
(m) (m) (m2) (m) (m/s) (m3/s)
(m) Auto CAD
2419.762 0 0 0 0 0 0
2420 0.238 0.46 3.44 0.13 1.11 0.51
2421 1.238 5.99 7.70 0.78 3.60 21.57
2422 2.238 14.71 11.37 1.29 5.05 74.36
2422.186 2.424 16.57 11.84 1.40 5.33 88.26 Flood mark
2423 3.238 25.54 14.71 1.74 6.15 157.07
Rating curve
202
2423.5
2423 2423
2422.5
2422.186
2422 2422
2421.5
2421 2421
Elevation(m)
2420.5
2420 2420

2419.762
2419.5
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165
Discharge(m3/s)
5.2.4 Design Flood Level (Chapter3.1.1(4))

See 5.2.6 (2)
5.2.5 Elevation of Crest Height and Length of Weir (Chapter3.1.4(2))

An example calculation on elevation of crest height of weir is as follows,
- Design water intake level + margin (+10cm) = EL.2422m + 0.1m

= EL.2422.1m
- Crest height of weir = EL.2422.1m – Average river bed level (EL.2420.5m)

= 1.6m
And the length of weir can be decided from cross-section survey data and
geological data of the bank around weir site.
- Based on the survey data of cross-section on weir site and geological data
of the bank around weir site (up to the hard rock), the length of weir =
12.5m (EL.2422.1m).
5.2.6 Possible Effect on the River Control of Upstream (Chapter3.1.4(4),

3.1.1(4))
An example calculation on possible effect on the river control of upstream is
as follows,
(1) Water depth of the river where the place of headworks before
construction as design flood discharge (Tail water depth)
From 5.2.3(2), the depth of the river at design flood discharge (Qmax =
106m3/s) = EL. 2422.4m (Reading from the Rating Curve)
So, Tail water depth = EL. 2422.4m – EL.2420.5m = 1.9m
(2) Water depth on the crest as design flood discharge …… (See 3.1.1(4))
- Total energy head as design flood discharge
He = (Qd / CL)2/3 = (106m3/s / (1.7 × 12.5m))2/3 = 2.92m
- Water depth on the crest
He = Hd + Qd2/ ( ( L ( h + Hd ) )2 × 2g)
∴0 = Hd + Qd2/ ( ( L ( h + Hd ) )2 × 2g) – He
= Hd + 1062 / ( ( 12.5 × ( 1.6 + Hd ) )2 × 2 × 9.8) - 2.92
The value of Hd is calculated by trial and error calculation. Refer to Excel
format guide 5 for calculation of above formula.
The result of calculation, Hd = 2.72m, Hav = He - Hd = 2.92 – 2.72 = 0.20m
203
Excel format guide 5. Water depth on the crest
1. Design head
①Total energy head (He) = 2.92 m

②Design flood discharge (Qd) = 106 m3/s
③Length of weir (L)= 12.5 m
④Weir height (h) = 1.6 m
⑤Design head (Hd) = 2.724 m ← Goal seek ("By changing cell")
⑥The result of calculation 0.000 ← Goal seek ("set cell". "to value" = 0)
204
If upstream of weir is filled up until crest,

He = Hd + Qd2 / ( ( L ( 0 + Hd ) )2 × 2g )
∴0 = Hd + Qd2 / ( ( L × Hd )2 × 2g ) - He = Hd + 1062/( ( 12.5 × Hd )2 × 2 × 9.8 )
- 2.92
The result of calculation, Hd = 2.04m, Hav = He - Hd = 2.92 – 2.04 = 0.88m
Hd value should adopt the biggest one from the result of above calculation.
So Hd = 2.72m
Design flood level at weir = Hd + Elevation of weir crest

= 2.72m + EL.2422.1m = EL.2424.82m
Hav=Va2/2g
Qmax He Hd
h Weir
Sediment
3) Study of possible effect on the river control of upstream
According to the design flood level at weir (EL.2424.82m), river slope (1/35)
and cross-section data, possible effect on the river control of upstream can
be assumed or modeled.
205
5.3 Detail Design (Chapter3.2)
5.3.1 Fixed Weir (Chapter3.2.2)
An example calculation for fixed weir is as follows,
(1) Section shape
1) The crest height of weir = 1.6m (from 5.2.5)
2) The top width of weir (Supposition of section dimension)

… (See 3.2.2(1)1))
- Bligh’s method; B = (Hd + Hav) / √γ = (2.72 + 0.20) / √2.35 = 1.90m
- Etcheverry’s method; B = 0.552 ( √h + √ ( Hd + Hav ) )
= 0.552 × (√1.6 + √( 2.72 + 0.20 ) ) = 1.64m
So, it selects average between Bligh’s method and Etcheverry’s method
(1.90 + 1.64) / 2 = 1.77m ≈ 2.0m
3) The bottom width of the weir (Supposition of section dimension)

… (See 3.2.2(1)2))
- Bligh’s formula; L = (h + Hd + Hav) / √γ
= (1.6 + 2.72 + 0.20) / √2.35
= 2.95m ≈ 3.8m
(After calculate stability analysis, L is to be 3.8m finally)
(2) Determination of section (Stability analysis) ….. (See 3.2.2(3), (4))
Section shape of weir has to check the stability by stability analysis.

The calculation is difference whether downstream water height is higher
than crest height.
206
Excel format guide 6. HW Stability Analysis (Summary)
【Case1 : Hdownstream < Hw】
1.Basic data for calculation
Item Value Reference
3
Unit weight of plane concrete γc＝ 23 kN/m Reinforced concrete: 24.5KN/m3, Plain concrete: 23KN/m3, Cement mortar: 21KN/m3
3
Unit weight of wet soil γwse＝ 18 kN/m
3
Unit weight of water W0 ＝ 9.8 kN/m
3
Unit weight of submerged soil γwe＝ 8.2 kN/m （γwse－w0）
Coefficient of earth pressure C0＝ 0.45
Uplift coefficient μ＝ 0.4 Rock foundation case or a case using sheet piles reaching an impermeable stratum: 0.4, Otherwise: 1.0
Seismic horizontal acceleration kh＝ 0.15
Friction coefficient f＝ 0.7 0.7‐0.75
2
Allowable stress of the graund qa＝ 1000 kN/m Bedrock=100t/m2*9.8m/s2=980KN/m2 See 3.2.4
2.Mesurement of structure 3. The result of calculation

Item Value Content Flood Dry Earthquake
Slope of front body m=1: 1.13 Overturning e<B/6 or B/3 0.06 ≤ 0.63 OK 0.28 ≤ 0.63 OK 0.16 ≤ 1.27 OK
B1 2.00 m Sliding ΣV・f/ΣH≥1.5or1.2 1.653 ≥ 1.50 OK 3.84 ≥ 1.50 OK 1.99 ≥ 1.20 OK
Settlement < 1,000kN/m2 OK 36kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK 31kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK
B2 1.80 m ΣV/B・(1+6e/B)<qa 31kN/m2
1,000kN/m2
207
B (B1+B2) 3.80 m ΣV/B・(1-6e/B)<qa 26kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK 14kN/m2 < OK 19kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK
Hw 1.60 m (Without uplift) ΣV/B・(1+6e/B)<qa 48kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK 42kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK 37kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK
Hd 2.72 m (Without uplift) ΣV/B・(1-6e/B)<qa 33kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK 14kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK 19kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK
Hdownstream 1.90 m
He 2.92 m
He
Hd
B1
B2
Hdd

Hdownstream Hw
1:m
①Stability analysis (The case of flood)
1.Basic calculation 2.Calculation table
(1 )Area （unit width）
External force Area Vertical DistanceResistance Horizontal Distance Turning
Dead load; W1 3.20m2= 2.00m× 1.60m force moment force moment
W2 1.44m2= 1.80m× 1.60m× 1/2 Ｖ(kN) ｘ(m) V*x(kN･m) Ｈ(kN) ｙ(m) H*y(kN･m)
Static water P1 4.67m2= 2.92m× 1.60m Dead load W1 73.60 1.00 73.60
pressure; P2 1.28m2= 1.60m× 1.60m× 1/2 W2 33.12 2.60 86.11
P3 2.72m2= 2.72m× 2.00m× 1/2
P4 2.03m2= 1.90m× 2.14m× 1/2
P5 1.81m2= 1.90m× 1.90m× 1/2 water pressure P1 45.77 0.80 36.62
Earth pressure; Pe 1.28m2= 1.60m× 1.60m× 1/2 P2 12.54 0.53 6.65
Uplift; U1 8.21m2= 3.80m× (2.72m+ 1.60m) × 1/2 P3 26.66 0.67 17.86
U2 3.61m2= 3.80m× 1.90m× 1/2 P4 19.89 3.09 61.46
P5 -17.74 0.63 -11.18
(2)Distance
External force Distance
Dead load; W1 1.00m= 2.00m× 1/2 Earth pressure Pe 4.72 0.53 2.50
W2 2.60m= 2.00m+ 1.80m× 1/3 Uplift U1 -32.18 1.27 -40.87
Static water P1 0.80m= 1.60m× 1/2 U2 -14.15 2.53 -35.80
pressure; P2 0.53m= 1.60m× 1/3 Total 106.94 162.36 45.29 34.59
208
P3 0.67m= 2.00m× 1/3
P4 3.09m= 1.66m+ 2.14m× 2/3
P5 0.63m= 1.90m× 1/3
Earth pressure; Pe 0.53m= 1.60m× 1/3
Uplift; U1 1.27m= 3.80m× 1/3 He
U2 2.53m= 3.80m× 2/3 P3↓
Hd
B2 B1
(3)External force by unit width
External force
lf EExternal force by unit width
lf b i id h Hdd
Dead load; W1 73.60kN= 3.20m2× 23.00kN/m2 P1←
W2 33.12kN= 1.44m2× 23.00kN/m2 P4↓
Hw
45.77kN= 4.67m2× 9.80kN/m2 Hdownstream

Static water P1
↓w2 ↓w1
pressure; P2 12.54kN= 1.28m2× 9.80kN/m2 P5→
Pe← P2←

P3 26.66kN= 2.72m2× 9.80kN/m2
P4 19.89kN= 2.03m2× 9.80kN/m2
P5 ‐17.74kN= 1.81m2× ‐9.80kN/m2
4.72kN= 1.28m2× 8.20kN/m2 ×0.45 B U1↑
Earth pressure; Pe
Uplift; U1 ‐32.18kN= 8.21m2× ‐9.80kN/m2 ×0.4 U2↑
U2 ‐14.15kN= 3.61m2× ‐9.80kN/m2 ×0.4
②Stability analysis (The case of dry)
External force Area Vertical Distance Resistance Horizontal Distance Turning
Static water P1 Dead load W1 73.60 1.00 73.60
pressure; P2 1.28m2= 1.60m× 1.60m× 1/2 W2 33.12 2.60 86.11
P3
P4
P5 water pressure P1 0.00 0.00 0.00
Uplift; U1 3.04m2= 3.80m× 1.60m × 1/2 P3 0.00 0.00 0.00
U2 P4 0.00 0.00 0.00
P5 0.00 0.00 0.00
(2)Distance
Distance
W2 2.60m= 2.00m+ 1.80m× 1/3 Uplift U1 -11.92 1.27 -15.14
Static water P1 U2 0.00 0.00 0.00
pressure; P2 0.53m= 1.60m× 1/3 Seismic load S1
P3 S2
P4
209
P5 Total B1 94.80 144.57 17.26 9.15
B2
Uplift; U1 1.27m= 3.80m× 1/3
U2
Seismic load S1
Hw
S2
↓w2 ↓w1
(3)External force by unit width Pe← P2←
External force External force by unit width
Dead load; W1 73.60kN= 3.20m2× 23.00kN/m2
W2 33.12kN= 1.44m2× 23.00kN/m2 B U1↑

Static water P1

pressure; P2 12.54kN= 1.28m2× 9.80kN/m2
P3
P4
P5
Earth pressure; Pe 4.72kN= 1.28m2× 8.20kN/m2 ×0.45
Uplift; U1 ‐11.92kN= 3.04m2× ‐9.80kN/m2 ×0.4
U2
Seismic load S1
S2
③Stability analysis (the case of earthquick )
pressure; P2 1.28m2= 1.60m× 1.60m× 1/2 W2 33.12 2.60 86.11
P3
P4
Uplift; U1 3.04m2= 3.80m× 1.60m × 1/2 P3 0.00 0.00 0.00
U2 P4 0.00 0.00 0.00
P5 0.00 0.00 0.00
(2)Distance
W2 2.60m= 2.00m+ 1.80m× 1/3 Uplift U1 -11.92 1.27 -15.14
Static water P1 U2 0.00 0.00 0.00
pressure; P2 0.53m= 1.60m× 1/3 Seismic load S1 11.04 0.80 8.83
P3 S2 4.97 0.53 2.63
P4
P5 Total 94.80 144.57 33.27 20.61
210
Uplift; U1 1.27m= 3.80m× 1/3
U2
Seismic load S1 0.80m= 1.60m× 1/2
S2 0 53m=
0.53m= 1 60m×
1.60m× 1/3
B2 B1
W2 33.12kN= 1.44m2× 23.00kN/m2
←s1
Static water P1 ←s2 Hw

pressure; P2 12.54kN= 1.28m2× 9.80kN/m2 ↓w2 ↓w1

P3 Pe← P2←
P4
P5
Earth pressure; Pe 4.72kN= 1.28m2× 8.20kN/m2 ×0.45 B U1↑
Uplift; U1 ‐11.92kN= 3.04m2× ‐9.80kN/m2 ×0.4
U2
Seismic load S1 11.04kN= 73.60kN× 0.15
S2 4.97kN= 33.12kN× 0.15
Excel format guide 6. HW Stability Analysis (Summary)
【Case2 : Hdownstream > Hw】
1.Basic data for calculation
Item Value Reference
Unit weight of plane concrete γc＝ 23 kN/m3 Reinforced concrete: 24.5KN/m3, Plain concrete: 23KN/m3, Cement mortar: 21KN/m3
3
Unit weight of wet soil γwse＝ 18 kN/m
3
Unit weight of water W0＝ 9.8 kN/m
Unit weight of submerged soil γwe＝ 8.2 kN/m3（γwse－w0）
Coefficient of earth pressure C0＝ 0.45
Uplift coefficient μ＝ 0.4 Rock foundation case or a case using sheet piles reaching an impermeable stratum: 0.4, Otherwise: 1.0
Seismic horizontal acceleration kh＝ 0.15
Friction coefficient f＝ 0.7 0.7‐0.75
Allowable stress of the graund qa＝ 1000 kN/m2 Bedrock=1000KN/m2 See 3.2.4
2.Mesurement of structure 3. The result of calculation

Item Value Content Dynamic Static Earthquake
Slope of front body m=1: 1.13 Overturning e<B/6 or B/3 0.05 ≤ 0.63 OK 0.28 ≤ 0.63 OK 0.16 ≤ 1.27 OK
B1 2.00 m Sliding ΣV・f/ΣH≥1.5or1.2 1.510 ≥ 1.50 OK 3.84 ≥ 1.50 OK 1.99 ≥ 1.20 OK
B2 1.80 m Settlement ΣV/B・(1+6e/B)<qa 29kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK 36kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK 31kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK
B (B1+B2) 3.80 m ΣV/B・(1-6e/B)<qa 25kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK 14kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK 19kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK
Hw 1.60 m (Without uplift) ΣV/B・(1+6e/B)<qa 46kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK 42kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK 37kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK
211
Hd 2.72 m (Without uplift) ΣV/B・(1-6e/B)<qa 33kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK 14kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK 19kN/m2 < 1,000kN/m2 OK
Hdownstream 1.90 m
He 2.92 m
He
Hd
B2 B1
Hdownstream

Hw
1:m
①Stability analysis (The case of dynamic)

Static water P1 4.67m2= 2.92m× 1.60m Dead load W1 73.60 1.00 73.60
pressure; P2 1.28m2= 1.60m× 1.60m× 1/2 W2 33.12 2.60 86.11
P3 2.72m2= 2.72m× 2.00m× 1/2
P4 1.71m2= 1.90m× 1.80m× 1/2
P5 1.52m2= 1.90m× 1.60m× 1/2 water pressure P1 45.77 0.80 36.62
Uplift; U1 8.21m2= 3.80m× (2.72m+ 1.60m) × 1/2 P3 26.66 0.67 17.86
U2 3.61m2= 3.80m× 1.90m× 1/2 P4 16.76 3.20 53.63
P5 -14.90 0.53 -7.90
(2)Distance
W2 2.60m= 2.00m+ 1.80m× 1/3 Uplift U1 -32.18 1.27 -40.87
Static water P1 0.80m= 1.60m× 1/2 U2 -14.15 2.53 -35.80
pressure; P2 0.53m= 1.60m× 1/3 Total 103.81 154.53 48.13 37.87
212
P3 0.67m= 2.00m× 1/3
P4 3.20m= 2.00m+ 1.80m× 2/3
P5 0.53m= 1.60m× 1/3
Uplift; U1 1.27m= 3.80m× 1/3
U2 2.53m= 3.80m× 2/3 He
(3)External force by unit width P3↓

Hd
B2 B1
P4↓
W2 33.12kN= 1.44m2× 23.00kN/m2
P1←
Static water P1 45.77kN= 4.67m2× 9.80kN/m2 Hdownstream
pressure; P2 12.54kN= 1.28m2× 9.80kN/m2 Hw

P3 26.66kN= 2.72m2× 9.80kN/m2 ↓w2 ↓w1
P5→
P4 16.76kN= 1.71m2× 9.80kN/m2 Pe← P2←
P5 -14.90kN= 1.52m2× -9.80kN/m2
Uplift; U1 -32.18kN= 8.21m2× -9.80kN/m2 ×0.4 B U1↑
U2 -14.15kN= 3.61m2× -9.80kN/m2 ×0.4
U2↑
②Stability analysis (The case of static)

pressure; P2 1.28m2= 1.60m× 1.60m× 1/2 W2 33.12 2.60 86.11
P3
P4
Uplift; U1 3.04m2= 3.80m× 1.60m × 1/2 P3 0.00 0.00 0.00
U2 P4 0.00 0.00 0.00
P5 0.00 0.00 0.00
(2)Distance
Distance
W2 2.60m= 2.00m+ 1.80m× 1/3 Uplift U1 -11.92 1.27 -15.14
Static water P1 U2 0.00 0.00 0.00
pressure; P2 0.53m= 1.60m× 1/3 Seismic load S1
213
P3 S2
P4
P5 Total 94.80 144.57 17.26 9.15
Uplift; U1 1.27m= 3.80m× 1/3
U2
Seismic load S1
S2 B1
B2


Hw
W2 33.12kN= 1.44m2× 23.00kN/m2

↓w2 ↓w1
Static water P1
12.54kN=
Pe← P2←
pressure; P2 1.28m2× 9.80kN/m2
P3
P4
P5 B U1↑
Uplift; U1 -11.92kN= 3.04m2× -9.80kN/m2 ×0.4
U2
Seismic load S1
S2
③Stability analysis (the case of earthquick )

pressure; P2 1.28m2= 1.60m× 1.60m× 1/2 W2 33.12 2.60 86.11
P3
P4
Uplift; U1 3.04m2= 3.80m× 1.60m × 1/2 P3 0.00 0.00 0.00
U2 P4 0.00 0.00 0.00
P5 0.00 0.00 0.00
(2)Distance
W2 2.60m= 2.00m+ 1.80m× 1/3 Uplift U1 -11.92 1.27 -15.14
Static water P1 U2 0.00 0.00 0.00
pressure; P2 0.53m= 1.60m× 1/3 Seismic load S1 11.04 0.80 8.83
214
P3 S2 4.97 0.53 2.63
P4
P5 Total 94.80 144.57 33.27 20.61
Uplift; U1 1.27m= 3.80m× 1/3
U2
Seismic load S1 0.80m= 1.60m× 1/2
S2 0.53m= 1.60m× 1/3 B2 B1

Dead load; W1 73.60kN= 3.20m2× 23.00kN/m2 ←s1

←s2 Hw
W2 33.12kN= 1.44m2× 23.00kN/m2

↓w2 ↓w1
Static water P1
Pe← P2←
pressure; P2 12.54kN= 1.28m2× 9.80kN/m2
P3
P4
B U1↑
P5
Uplift; U1 -11.92kN= 3.04m2× -9.80kN/m2 ×0.4
U2
Seismic load S1 11.04kN= 73.60kN× 0.15
S2 4.97kN= 33.12kN× 0.15
(3) Apron ….. (See 3.2.2(6), 3.1.4(3), 3.2.5(1), 3.2.1(2)3))

【Case 1 : Riverbed is not scoured by overflow water (Riverbed is hard rock) 】
It is unnecessary to consider apron because the riverbed of upstream and
downstream of weir is hard rock. And the place of upstream of weir is also
expected sedimentation in the future.
【Case 2 : Riverbed is scoured by overflow water】
1) Length of downstream apron …………… (See 3.2.2(6)1))

The elevation of top surface of downstream end of apron is almost same
as river bed level of weir.
- D1 = Elevation of crest height of weir – River bed level
= EL.2422.1m - EL.2420.5m = 1.6m
- Bligh’s coefficient C = 9 (Sandy Gravel)
L1 = 0.6C√D1
= 0.6 × 9 × √1.6 = 6.83m ≈ 13.0m (After calculate creep length, L1 is to
be 13.0m finally)
2) Thickness of downstream apron

The thickness of downstream apron assumes as 1.7m at point A, 0.35m at
point B.
After the calculation below, it will be confirmed.
3) Depth of Cut-off wall …… (See 3.1.4(3), 3.2.5(1), (2))

There are two ways to calculate the depth of cut-off wall.
(a) The depth of Cut-off wall at upstream
In case of grain sizes of the subsoil is coarser than fine gravels,
the depth of Cut-off wall at upstream
= equal to the water depth of uprise
= Hd + h = 2.72 + 1.6 = 4.32m
(b) The depth of Cut-off wall at upstream and downstream

(Lacey’s formula)
R = 1.35 (q2 / f ) 1/3 = 1.35 ( ( Qd / L )2 / f ) 1/3
= 1.35( ( 106 / 12.5 )2 / 1.5 ) 1/3
= 5.0m
This value may be theoretical to provide practical value based on

geological condition because the calculated values above are very big. In
this case it adopts 2.5m.
215
3) Ensuring creep length …… (See 3.1.4(3))
2.72m ΔH1 = 2.42m
1.6m 2.0m
1.9m ΔH2 = 1.6m
Point A Point B
3.8m 13.0m
0.35m
2.5m 1.7m
2.15m
0.8m
1.0m 1.0m 1.8m 0.3m
(a) Bligh’s method

L ≧ C × ΔH
Where, Bligh’s coefficient C = 9 (Sandy Gravel)
ΔH1 = Hd + h – Tail water depth = 2.72 + 1.6 – 1.9 = 2.42m
ΔH2 = h = 1.6m
So, ΔH = 2.42m (ΔH1 > ΔH2)
C × ΔH = 9 × 2.42m = 21.78m

L = (2.5m + 0.8m + 1.7m) + (3.8m + 13.0m) = 21.8m
As the result of calculation, L = 21.8 ≧ C × ΔH = 21.78m, OK
(b) Lane’s method

L' ≧ C' × ΔH
Where Lane’s coefficient C' = 3.5 (Coarse Gravel)
ΔH = 2.42m (ΔH1 > ΔH2)
C'･ΔH = 3.5 × 2.42m = 8.47m

L' = (2.5m + 0.8m + 1.7m) + 1/3 × ( 3.8m + 13.0m ) = 10.6m
As the result of calculation, L' = 10.6m ≧ C'･ΔH = 8.47m, OK
From the result of (a) and (b), the length of apron and cut-off are OK.
4) Confirmation of thickness on downstream apron (Point A)

….(See 3.2.1(2)3))
T = 4/3 × (ΔH – Hf ) / (γ - 1)
Where ΔH = 2.42m
γ = 2.35 (Concrete)
216
(a) The case of Bligh’s method

Hf = ( ΔH / S ) × S' = ( ΔH / L ) × S'
= ( 2.42m / 21.8m ) × (2.5m + 0.8m + 3.8m) = 0.79m
(b) The case of Lane’s method

Hf = ( ΔH / S ) × S' = ( ΔH / L' ) × S'
= ( 2.42m / 10.6m ) × ((2.5m + 0.8m ) + 1/3 × 3.8m)
= 1.04m
Hf value adopts the smallest one from the result of calculation for safety.
So, Hf = 0.79m
T = 4/3 × (ΔH – Hf ) / (γ - 1) = 4/3 × (2.42 – 0.79) / (2.35 - 1) = 1.61m
It assumed the thickness of point A as 1.7m. So this assumption value does

not have any problem.
5) Confirmation of thickness on downstream apron (Point B)

T = 4/3 × (ΔH – Hf ) / (γ - 1)
Where ΔH = 2.42m
γ = 2.35 (Concrete)
(a) The case of Bligh’s method

Hf = ( ΔH / S ) × S' = ( ΔH / L ) × S'
= ( 2.42m / 21.8m ) × (2.5m + 0.8m + 1.35m + 3.8m +13.0m)
= 2.38m
(b) The case of Lane’s method

Hf = ( ΔH / S ) × S'
= ( ΔH / L' ) × S'
= (2.42m/10.6m) × ((2.5m + 0.8m + 1.35m) + 1/3 × (3.8m + 13.0m))
= 2.34m
Hf value adopts the smallest one from the result of calculation for safety.
So, Hf = 2.34m
T = 4/3 × (ΔH – Hf ) / (γ - 1) = 4/3 × (2.42 – 2.34) / (2.35 - 1) = 0.08m
It assumed the thickness of point B as 0.35m. So this assumption value

does not have any problem.
217
6) Upstream apron …………… (See 3.2.2(6)2))

If the place of upstream of weir is expected sedimentation in the future, it is
unnecessary to construct upstream apron.
On the other case, thickness on downstream apron = T × 1/2 ～ 2/3
= 1.7 × 1/2 ～ 2/3
= 0.85 ～ 1.1m
The length of upstream apron should decide based on the condition of river.
218
5.3.2 Riprap (Chapter 3.2.3)
An example calculation for riprap is as follows,
【Case 1 : Riverbed is not scoured by overflow water (Riverbed is hard rock) 】

It is unnecessary to consider riprap because the riverbed of upstream and
downstream of weir is hard rock.
【Case 2 : Riverbed is scoured by overflow water】
⊿Z
(1) Calculation of water depth at the weir toe as design flood discharge
….. (See 3.2.3(5)1)(a))
2 2
Vc V
 ⊿Z＋hc＝ 1a  h1a
2g 2g
Where, Qd = 106m3/s ………. (From 5.2.3)
W = 12.5m ……….…. (From 5.2.5)
⊿Z = h = 1.6m …….. (From 5.2.5)
q = Q / W = 106 / 12.5 = 8.48m3/s/m

hc = 3√ ( q2 / g ) = 3√ ( 8.482 / 9.8 ) = 1.94m
Vc = q / hc = 8.48 / 1.94 = 4.37m/s
∴Vc2 /2g + h + hc = h1a + V1a2 / 2g = h1a + q2 / (2g × h1a2)

∴4.372 /( 2 × 9.8 ) + 1.6 + 1.94 = h1a + 8.482 / (2 × 9.8 × h1a2)
∴0 = h1a + 71.91 / (19.6 × h1a2) – 4.51
The value of h1a is calculated by trial and error calculation. Refer to Excel
format guide 7 for calculation.
The result of calculation, h1a = 1.03m
219
Excel format guide 7. Water depth h1a
1. Water depth (h1a)

①Design flood discharge (Qd) = 106 m3/s

②Length of weir (W) = 12.5 m
③Flow per unit width of design flood discharge (q) 8.48 m3/s/m
④Weir height (h) = 1.6 m
⑤Critical depth (hc) = 1.94 m
⑥Velocity of critical depth (Vc) = 4.37 m
⑦Water depth on the crest (Hd) = 1.026 m ← Goal seek ("By changing cell")
⑧The result of calculation 0.000 ← Goal seek ("set cell". "to value" = 0)
220
(2) Calculation of water depth at the beginning point of hydraulic jump

….. (See 3.2.3(5)1)(b))
h1b / h2 = 1 / 2 × ( √ ( 1 + 8F2 ) -1 )
2
Where, h2 = 1.9m (From 5.2.6(1))

F2 = V2 / √(gh2) = q / ( h2 × √(gh2) )
= 8.48 / ( 1.9 × √( 9.8 × 1.9 ) ) = 1.03
∴h1b = h2 / 2 × ( √ ( 1 + 8F22 ) -1 ) = 1.9 / 2 × (√ ( 1 + 8 × 1.032 ) -1) = 1.98m
(3) Comparison with h1a and h1b ….. (See 3.2.3(5)1)(c))

h1a = 1.03m < h1b = 1.98m
So, it needs riprap.
(4) Calculation of supercritical flow length ….. (See 3.2.3(5)1)(c))

-q2 x / C2 + a = h4/4 – hc3 × h
Where, C = h1/6 / n
- h1a is substituted for this equation (h = h1a, x=0)

a = h1a 4/4 – hc3 h1a = 1.034 / 4 – 1.943 × 1.03 = -7.24
- h1b is substituted for this equation (h = h1b)

n = 0.04
C = h1b 1/6 / n = 1.981/6 / 0.04 = 28.01
X = L1 = -C2 / q2 ( h1b 4/4 – hc3h1b – a )
= -1 × 28.012 / 8.482 × ( 1.984 / 4 – 1.943 × 1.98 + 7.24 ) = 36.82m
(5) The length of hydraulic jump ….. (See 3.2.3(5)1)(c))

L2 = (4.5～6) × h2 = (4.5～6) × 1.9 = 8.55～11.4m
(6) Necessary Length of riprap A ….. (See 3.2.3(5)1)(c))

L = L1 + L2 = 36.82m + 8.55～11.4m = 45.37～48.22m ≈ 48.0m
(7) Length of riprap B ….. (See 3.2.3(6))

L = (3～5) × h2 = (3～5) × 1.9 = 5.7～9.5m ≈ 9.0m
(8) Length of upstream riprap ….. (See 3.2.3(4))

The length of upstream riprap is desirably longer than water depth at the
flood time (Hd = 2.72m). In consideration of water depth, upstream length is
designed as follows.
Length of upstream riprap : L= 3.00m
221
5.3.3 Foundation Work (Chapter 3.2.4)

An example calculation for foundation is as follows,
Example;
Based on geological data, this weir foundation selects spread foundation
because there is hard rock (hard brown Ignimbrite rock) at proposed
headworks site excavated around 0.5m to 1.5m from the surface.
- Average river bed level = EL.2420.5m

- Foundation = EL.2420.5m – 0.5 ～ 1.5m
= EL.2420m ～ EL.2419m (Until hard rock)
In reference to Chapter 3.2.4 (Table3.11), long-term allowable bearing

capacity is adopted 1000KN/m2 of bedrock.
5.3.4 Upstream and Downstream Cut-off Walls (Chapter 3.2.5)

An example calculation for cut-off wall is as follows,
【Case 1 : Foundation is non-permeable foundation (Riverbed is hard rock) 】

The weir can be constructed directly on the bedrock. So it is unnecessary to
consider cut-off wall.
【Case 2 : Foundation is permeable foundation 】

See 5.3.1(3)
5.3.5 Inlet (Chapter 3.2.6)

See 5.2.2
5.3.6 Gate (Chapter 3.2.7)
An example calculation for gate is as follows,
According to 5.3.9, the size of scouring sluice gate is H = 1.6m, Bs = 1.0m

So, Skin plate area = 1.6 × 1.0 = 1.6m2
This gate will be opened during rainy season, so the upstream water height
of gate assumes height of gate plus half of design flood height for safety.
Hupstream = 1.6m + 2.72m/2 = 1.6 + 1.36 = 2.96m
According to the 3.2.7(4), thickness of gate is 10mm.
222
5.3.7 Settling Basin (Chapter 3.2.8(1))
An example calculation for settling basin is as follows,
【Case 1 : In case of enough prevention of sediment inflow into the canal by

feature of inlet and scouring sluice 】
Enough prevention of sediment inflow into the canal is as follows:
 The height from the scouring sluice sill to the inlet sill is higher than
1.0m.
 The height from the riverbed to the inlet sill is more than 1/6 of
maximum flood depth of the river.
 Installation of Intake gate
It is unnecessary to consider settling basin when these three points above

are satisfied.
【Case 2 : In case of lack of prevention of sediment inflow into the canal by

scouring sluice and feature of inlet 】
(1) Width and depth of sedimentation ditch ….. (See 3.2.8(1)5)(b))
1) Calculation of κ
τc / ρ = 8.41 × d 11/32 Where, d = 0.03cm, ρ = 1.0

∴ τc = 8.41 × 0.03 11/32 = 2.52cm2/sec2
κ = τc / ρi Where, i = 1/50 = 0.02 (Assumption value)

∴ κ = 2.52 / (1 × 0.02) = 126 cm2/sec2 = 0.0126m2/sec2
2) Calculation of B and H
1/ 2
 Q2 
B   h 2  
 h
 kh 2
Where, h = 0.6m (Assumption value)
 
Q = 0.063m3/s (From 5.2.1)
α = 1.2
∴ B = ( 0.62 + 1.2 × 0.0632 / (0.0126 × 0.62) )1/2 – 0.6 = 0.59m ≈ 0.6m
H=D+h Where, D = 0.25m

∴ H = 0.25 + 0.6 = 0.85m
223
(2) Length of sedimentation ditch ….. (See 3.2.8(1)6))
1) Formula from sedimentation theory

h Q
LK uK Where, K = 2.0
vg Bv g
Vg = 0.025 (ρs = 1.1, d = 0.3mm)
∴ L = 2 × 0.063 / ( 0.6 × 0.025) = 8.4m
2) Empirical formula
L  20 Q = 20 × √ 0.063 = 5.02m
The result of calculation 1) and 2), the length of sedimentation ditch adopts
8.4m
5.3.8 Protection of Bank and Major Bed (Chapter 3.2.8(2))
An example calculation for protection bank is as follows,
In the place of headworks, if there is low elevation land than design flood
level (EL. 2424.82m), it is necessary to protect this part from flood.
This part is protected by gabion starting from EL.2423.4m (Stable bank. The
depth of foot protection from O.G.L is 0.5m.) to EL.2424.82 (Design flood
level) + 0.5～0.6m (freeboard) which is equal to EL.2425.4m. For the length
of 10m, bottom width is 1.0m and thickness is 0.5m.
EL.2425.4m
O.G.L EL.2423.9m
Stable bank (hard rock) 0.5m EL.2423.4m
1.0m
5.3.9 Scouring Sluice (Chapter 3.2.1(3), 2.1.2(3))
An example calculation for scouring sluice in case of rapid stream (river

slope ≥ 1/800) is as follows,
224
(1) Diameter of riverbed materials ….. (See 2.1.2(3))

- Maximum grain size (90 percent passing by weight) de = 0.5m
- Average grain size (60 percent passing by weight) dm= 0.15m
(From the geological study data)
(2) Design of scouring sluice intake …… (See 3.2.1(3)4)(a))

In the condition that the flow within the scouring sluice should be
supercritical, the critical flow will be caused at the intake. And the design
should be so made as to transport the maximum size particles of the
riverbed materials with this critical flow.
The critical velocity required to transport sediment Ve can be given by the
following formula experimentally. And the critical water depth hc and the
flow per unit width qe can be given by the below formula respectively.
Ve = √ ( 20 × de ) = √ ( 20 × 0.50 ) = 3.16 m/s

hc = 20 × de / g = 20 × 0.50 / 9.8 = 1.02 m
qe = √ (( 20 × de )3 / g2 ) = √(( 20 × 0.50 )3/ 9.82 ) = 3.23 m3/s/m
The height of the guide wall H required to form a channel for the scouring
sluice is made 1.5hc at the point of intake.
H＝1.5 × hc＝1.5 × 1.02 > 1.5m
So, the height of the guide wall : H＝1.6m = weir height

The critical water depth : hc ＝ H / 1.5＝ 1.6 / 1.5 ＝1.07m
So, qe = √(g hc3) = √(9.8 × 1.073) = 3.46 m3/s/m

(This formula is from hc = 3√(qe2/g) )
(3) Engineering of upstream portion of scouring sluice

…… (See 3.2.1(3)4)(b))
225
1=S++1.5Hs
Where S=0.7m, =0.4m, Hs=1.5m

1 = 0.7＋0.4＋1.5 × 1.5 = 3.35 (m)
The upstream length of scouring sluice is 1 = 3.35m on calculation,
1 = 3.7m is adopted as design length.
The elevation at point EL2 of the inflow of the scouring sluice in principle
should be almost the same as the existing riverbed elevation. The average
river slope is 0.029.
So, the riverbed elevation is 3.7m × 0.029 ＋ EL2420.5m = EL2420.61m.
Therefore, the EL2 = 2420.61m is adopted.
(4) Cannel width of scouring sluice

….… (See 3.2.1(3)6), Reference1, Reference 2)
Bs ≤ Qs / qe
≤ Qs / 3.46 (From 5.3.9(2))
Assumption of the river discharge at the limit of average grain size

transportation (Qs)
- The Froude number (Fr)

Fr = 9.82(√i)0.933 - 300(√i)0.933 = 9.82(√0.029)0.933 - 300(√0.029)3.5 = 1.27
- The friction velocity at the limit of average grain size transportation (UXc)
UXc2 = 80.9dm = 80.9 × 15 (cm/sec)2 = 1213.5 (cm/sec)2
- The water depth at the limit of average grain size transportation (hsc)
hsc = UXc 2/ gi = 1213.5 / ( 980 × 0.029) = 42.7cm = 0.43m
- The discharge per unit width for the limit of average grain size
transportation (qsc)
h = (q2/gFr2)1/3
∴ q = Fr × g1/2 × h3/2
∴ qsc = Fr × g1/2 × hsc3/2 = 1.27 × 9.81/2 × 0.433/2 = 1.12 m3/s/m
226
- The river discharge at the limit of average grain size transportation (Qs)
Qs = qsc × B = 1.12 × 12.5 = 14 m3/s
Where, River width B = 12.5m
The result of calculation of Qs, Bs ≤ Qs / 3.46 = 14 / 3.46 = 4.05m
In case of wider cannel width, required discharge can be increased and the
sand flushing capacity is declined.
When the width is smaller than a half of its length, from the viewpoint of
sand flushing function of the scouring sluice, the direction of the flow can be
controlled more easily. And also the width of scouring sluice is decided
based on the applicable size of skin plate shown in 3.2.7(4). From these
viewpoints, the width of scouring sluice is adopted to 1.0m. (See 5.3.6)
(5) Design of upstream slope of cannel …(See 3.2.1(3)4)(b), Reference2 (iv))
n2 g n 2 ghc 3 8.25  10 2 d m
 
hc1 / 3 hm10 / 3 hm
Where n=0.018, hc=1.07(m), hm : (hc+h)/2 (m) , dm=0.15 (m)
In assuming the water depth at the downstream end of the supercritical flow
canal h and then value of the canal, following table can be obtained. Refer to
Excel format guide 8 for the details.
Example;
Test calculation table of water depth
h hm ｎ2・ｇｎ2・ｇ・ｈc3 8.25　 10 -2 　 dm
　　　 10/3 　
(m) ｈ c1 3 < ｈm < ｈm
0.9 0.985 1/322 < 1/244 < 1/80 OK

1.0 1.035 1/322 < 1/288 < 1/84 OK
1.1 1.085 1/322 > 1/337 < 1/88 NG
From the above table, the water depth at the downstream end of the
scouring sluice channel h becomes h = 1.0m to give a value of grain size
larger than that with maximum grain size in the sediment to be flushed,
taking into account the energy loss due to sediment transportation and the
roughness coefficient n = 0.018.
227
Consequently, the length of channel 1 is 1 = 3.7m and the slope of the

channel bed is obtained from the formula below:
1 ｈ c3  ｎ 2・ｇ・ｈ c 3
i  ｈ＋　２－1.5hc  　＋　
　
 2ｈ  ｈ m 10 3
= 1/3.7 (1.0 + 1.073 /2 × 1.02 - 1.5 × 1.07) + 0.0182 × 9.8 × 1.073 /1.03510/3
= 0.0055 = 1/182
The elevation of scouring sluice gate sill EL1 is EL.2420.61m － 3.7m ×

1/182＝EL2420.58m on calculation, EL1=EL2420.50m is adopted. (same
elevation of average of river bed)
Consequently, the slope of upstream cannel is

I =(EL2420.61m－EL2420.5m）/3.7m ＝ 0.11m/3.7m＝ 0.0297 = 1/34
< Confirming calculation > ….. (See 3.2.1(3)4)(b))
- The discharge of scouring slice (Q)

Q = B × qe = 1 × 3.46 = 3.46 m3/s
In case of n = 0.015, according to Manning formula, h is

Q = B h I1/2 (Bh/B+2h)2/3 / n
3.46 = 1 × h × ( 1 / 34 )1/2 × ( 1 × h/ 1 + 2h )2/3 / 0.015
∴ h = 1.21 (Refer to Excel format guide 8)
So, h = 1.21 > de = 0.5 OK.
228
Excel format guide 8. Scouring sluice
1.Test calculation table of water depth

#Blue cell is the "set sell" for Goal seek. "to value" = Q value
<Formula>
n2g/hc1/3 < n2ghc3/hm10/3 < 8.25*10-2dm/hm
n= 0.018
2
g= 9.8 m/s
hc = 1.07 m
hm = (hc+h)/2 m
dm = 0.15 m
↓This value is assumption

h(m) hm n2g/hc1/3 < n2ghc3/hm10/3 < 8.25*10-2dm/hm
0.3 0.685 0.0031044 = 1/322 0.0137284 = 1/73 0.0180657 = 1/55 OK
0.35 0.71 0.0031044 = 1/322 0.0121823 = 1/82 0.0174296 = 1/57 OK
0.4 0.735 0.0031044 = 1/322 0.0108550 = 1/92 0.0168367 = 1/59 OK
0.45 0.76 0.0031044 = 1/322 0.0097098 = 1/103 0.0162829 = 1/61 OK
0.5 0.785 0.0031044 = 1/322 0.0087168 = 1/115 0.0157643 = 1/63 OK
0.55 0.81 0.0031044 = 1/322 0.0078519 = 1/127 0.0152778 = 1/65 OK
0.6 0.835 0.0031044 = 1/322 0.0070952 = 1/141 0.0148204 = 1/67 OK
0.65 0.86 0.0031044 = 1/322 0.0064307 = 1/156 0.0143895 = 1/69 OK
0.7 0.885 0.0031044 = 1/322 0.0058449 = 1/171 0.0139831 = 1/72 OK
0.8 0.935 0.0031044 = 1/322 0.0048665 = 1/205 0.0132353 = 1/76 OK
0.9 0.985 0.0031044 = 1/322 0.0040907 = 1/244 0.0125635 = 1/80 OK
1 1.035 0.0031044 = 1/322 0.0034683 = 1/288 0.0119565 = 1/84 OK
1.1 1.085 0.0031044 = 1/322 0.0029636 = 1/337 0.0114055 = 1/88 NG
1.2 1.135 0.0031044 = 1/322 0.0025504 = 1/392 0.0109031 = 1/92 NG
1.3 1.185 0.0031044 = 1/322 0.0022090 = 1/453 0.0104430 = 1/96 NG
1.4 1.235 0.0031044 = 1/322 0.0019247 = 1/520 0.0100202 = 1/100 NG
229
2.Test calculation of upstream slope
1 = 3.7 m
h = 1m
hm = 1.035
= 0.005501175 = 1/182
3.Confirming a calculation
<Formula>
Q = B*h* I 1/2 * (Bh/(B+2h))2/3 / n
n = 0.015
Q = 3.46 m3/s
B = 1m
I = 0.0297
de = 0.5 m
↓ Goal seek ("By changing cell")
h = 1.21 m > 0.5 OK
The result of calculation
3.460 ← Goal seek ("set cell". "to value" = Q value)
230
(6) Design of downstream cannel
- The length of downstream cannel is designed about 1.5 times of width of

cannel ….. (See 3.2.1(3)4)(c))
l2 ＝1.5･B＝1.5 × 1.00m
＝1.50m
→ 2.2m (From gate to end of the bottom width of the weir)
- The calculation of h2 and h3 … (See 3.2.1(3), Reference2)

F22 = qe2 / gh23 = 1.752
∴ h2 = (qe2 / gFr2)1/3 = (3.462 / (9.8 × 1.752))1/3 = 0.74m
h3 = (h2 /2) × (-1+ √(8F22+1) ) = (0.74/2) × (-1 + √(8 × 1.752 + 1 ) ) = 1.50m
- The calculation of i2 ….. (See 3.2.1(3)4)(c))

i2 = - 1/l2 ((h–h2) + qe2 /2g + (1/h2 – 1 / h22 )) + n2 qe2 / (( h + h2 ) / 2 )10/3
= -1 / 2.2 × ( (1.0 - 0.74) + 3.462 / (2 × 9.8) × (1/1.02 –1 / 0.742 ) ) +
0.0182 × 3.462 / ( (1.0 + 0.74) / 2 )10/3 = 0.117 = 1/8.6
So, EL3 = EL.2420.5m – 2.2 × 0.117 = EL.2420.24m
- The calculation of l3 ….. (See 3.2.1(3)4)(c))

l3 = 4.5～6 × h3 = 4.5 × 1.50 = 6.75 ≈ 7.0m
- The calculation of H2 ….. (See 3.2.1(3), Reference2(v))

And the height of the downstream guide wall H2, when the sedimentation is
deemed to occur at downstream of the weir, can be obtained from the
following formula: Provided that H2 is based on the gate sill as a datum level.
H2 = {(design intake water level) - (gate sill elevation)} × 2/3

= ( EL.2422m - EL.2420.5m ) × 2/3
= 1.0m
231
5.4 How to use “Goal seek”
There is a function named “Goal Seek” on Excel.

This function can simplify trial and error calculation.
To use this function, it has to go to [Data] tab on Excel, then select [What-IF
Analysis], and select [Goal Seek]. Place of item is shown below.
After select [Goal Seek], it can be selected “Set cell” which is having formula.
Then enter a figure into “To value” which is target value.
Finally it can be selected “By changing cell” which is a cell to change figure
to get target value. This cell’s figure is an assumption value at first.
After those three cells are set on Goal Seek and click on OK, Excel calculates
to find target value by itself and show that value under “By changing cell”.
There is some guidance about “Set cell”, “To value” and “By changing cell” in
Excel format guide on this manual as follows.
232
<Example>
In this case above,
“Set cell” is a ⑥ cell (blue color cell) which is having formula about the
calculation of Design head,
“To value” is 0 because the formula about the calculation of Design head
should be close to zero as much as possible,
“By changing cell” is ⑤ cell (green cell). This cell’s figure is an assumption
value at first.
After those three cells are set on Goal Seek and click on OK, the value of “By
changing cell” is shown most proper value (target value) to be close to zero
as the answer of formula about the calculation of Design head automatically.
233
References
1. Engineering Manual for Irrigation & Drainage, Headworks, The Japanese

Institute of Irrigation and Drainage, 1989
2. Design of Headworks, Japanese Society of Irrigation, Drainage and Rural

Engineering, 1982
3. Guideline for Structure design of ground sill, Japan Institute of Country-

ology and Engineering, 1998
234
List of Authors

Name of Guidelines and Manuals Name Field Affiliation
Ministry of
Water resources
Mr. Nobuhiko Suzuki Agriculture, Forestry
Guideline for Irrigation Master planning
and Fisheries
Plan Study Preparation
on Surface Water Resources
Mr. Roba Muhyedin Irrigation Engineer OIDA Head Office
LANDTEC JAPAN,
Manual for Runoff Analysis Mr. Yasukazu Kobayashi Runoff Analysis
Inc.
Manual of GIS for ArcGIS KOKUSAI KOGYO

Mr. Ron Nagai GIS Application
(Basic & Advanced Section) CO., LTD.
Manual on Land Use Classification KOKUSAI KOGYO

Mr. Kazutoshi Masuda Remote Sensing
Analysis Using Remote Sensing CO., LTD.
Guidance for Oromia Irrigation Facility Ministry of
Development Project Mr. Kenjiro Futagami Design/Construction Agriculture, Forestry
Implementation Supervision and Fisheries
Study and Design Technical Facility Design/ Ministry of
Guideline for Irrigation Projects Mr. Naoto Takano Construction Agriculture, Forestry
(Irrigaiton Engineering Part) Supervision and Fisheries
(Socio-Economy, Community,
Financial and Economic analysis Mr. Tafesse Andargie Economist OIDA Head Office
Part)
(Agronomy and Soil Part) Mr. Abdeta Nate'a Agronomist OIDA Head Office
Technical Guideline for Sanyu Consultants

Mr. Motohisa Wakatsuki Head works design
Design of Headworks Inc.
Project
Technical Guideline for Small Sanyu Consultants
Mr. Haruo Hiki Management/
Scale Reservoir Inc.
Planning/Reservoir
Facility Design/ Ministry of
Technical Guideline for Irrigation
Mr. Naoto Takano Construction Agriculture, Forestry
Canal and Related Structures
Supervision and Fisheries
Construction
Construction Control Manual Mr. Yoshiaki Otsubo Supervision (Bura Tokura Corporation
SSSIP)
Guidance for Preparation of Facility Ministry of
Operation and Maintenance Mr. Kenjiro Futagami Design/Construction Agriculture, Forestry
Manual Supervision and Fisheries
Irrigation Water Users Association
Formation and Development Mr. Tafesse Andargie Economist OIDA Head Office
Manual
Strengthening of
Mr. Yasushi Osato Nippon Koei Co.
Strengthening Irrigation Water WUA
Users Association (IWUA)
Guideline
Mr. Tafesse Andargie Economist OIDA Head Office
Small Scale Irrigation Water

Management Guideline Mr. Yohannes Geleta Irrigation Engineer OIDA Head Office
(Irrigation Water Supply Part)
(Field Irrigation Water
Mr. Abdeta Nate'a Agronomist OIDA Head Office
Management Part)
Remarks: Affiliation is shown when he work for CBID project.
235
List of Experts who contributed to revise guidelines and manuals (1/5)

Office Name Specialty
OIDA Head office Mr. Abdeta Nate'a Agronomist
OIDA Head office Mr. Kibrom Driba Irrigation Engineer
OIDA Head office Mr. Kurabachew Shewawerk Agronomist
OIDA Head office Mr. Lemma Adane Irrigation Engineer
OIDA Head office Mr. Roba Muhyedin Irrigation Engineer
OIDA Head office Mr. Shemeles Tefera Agronomist
OIDA Head office Ms. Sintayehu Getahun Irrigation Engineer
OIDA Head office Mr. Tafesse Andargie Economist
OIDA Head office Mr. Tafesse Tsegaye Irrigation Engineer
OIDA Head office Mr. Tatek Worku Irrigation Engineer
OIDA Head office Mr. Teferi Dhaba Irrigation Engineer
OIDA Head office Mr. Terfasa Fite Irrigation Engineer
OIDA Head office Mr. Tesfaye Deribe Irrigation Engineer
OIDA Head office Mr. Yohannes Dessalegn Economist

OIDA Head office Mr. Yohannes Geleta Irrigation Engineer
OWMEB Mr. Girma Etana Irrigation Engineer
OWMEB Mr. Kedir Lole Irrigation Engineer
Arsi Mr .Dedefi Ediso Agronomist
Arsi Mr. Birhanu Mussie Irrigation Engineer
Arsi Mr. Dinberu Abera Sociologist
Arsi Mr. Hussen Beriso Economist
Arsi Mr. Mulat Teshome Surveyor
Arsi Mr. Segni Bilisa Agronomist
Arsi Mr. Shewngezew Legesse Irrigation Engineer
236

Arsi Mr. Tamerwold Elias Irrigation Engineer

Arsi Mr. Tesfaye Gudisa Irrigation engineer
Arsi Mr. Teshome Eda'e Irrigation Engineer
Arsi Ms. Worknesh Kine Geologist
Bale Mr. Abboma Terresa Irrigation Engineer
Bale Mr. Abdulreshed Namo Irrigation Engineer
Bale Mr. Beyan Ahmed Economist
Bale Mr. Diriba Beyene Irrigation Engineer
Bale Mr. Firew Demeke Teferi Irrigation engineer
Bale Mr. Gosa Taye Debela Irrigation engineer
Bale Mr. Zeleke Agonafir Agronomist
Borena Mr. Dida Sola Irrigation Engineer
East Harerge Mr. Abdi Abdulkedar Irrigation Engineer
East Harerge Mr. Elias Abdi Irrigation Engineer
East Harerge Mr. Shemsedin kelil Irrigation Engineer
East Harerge Ms. Eskedar Mulatu Economist
East Shewa Mr. Andaregie Senbeta Economist
East Shewa Mr. Bekele Gebre Irrigation Engineer
East Shewa Mr. Dilibi ShekAli Sociologist
East Shewa Mr. Ejara Tola Agronomist
East Shewa Mr. Girma Niguse Irrigation Engineer
East Shewa Mr. Kebebew Legesse Irrigation Engineer
East Shewa Mr. Mulatu Wubishet Agronomist
East Shewa Mr. Tadesse Mekuria Agronomist
237

East Shewa Ms. Tigist Amare Irrigation Engineer

East Shewa Mr. Zerfu Seifu Irrigation Engineer
East Welega Mr. Benti Abose Economist
East Welega Mr. Birhanu Yadete Agronomist
East Welega Mr. Dasalegn Tesema Economist
East Welega Mr. Gamachis Asefa Irrigation Engineer
East Welega Mr. Getachew Irena Agronomist
East Welega Mr. Kidane Fekadu Irrigation Engineer
East Welega Mr. Milikesa Workeneh Irrigation Engineer
East Welega Ms. Mulunesh Bekele Irrigation Engineer
East Welega Mr. Samson Abdu Irrigation Engineer
East Welega Mr. Tulam Admasu Irrigation Engineer
East Welega Ms. Yeshimebet Bule Economist
Guji Mr. Abadir Sultan Sociology
Guji Mr. Dawud Menza Irrigation Engineer
Guji Mr. Fikadu Mekonin Geologist
Guji Mr. Megersa Ensermu Irrigation Engineer
Guji Mr. Wandesen Bakale Economist
Horoguduru Welega Mr. Seleshi Terfe Economist
Horoguduru Welega Mr. Temesgen Mekonnen Irrigation Engineer
Horoguduru Welega Mr. Tesfaye Chimdessa Economist
Illubabor Mr. Ahmed Sani Irrigation Engineer
Jimma Mr. Lebeta Adera Irrigation Engineer
Kelem Welega Mr. Ayana Fikadu Agronomist
238

Kelem Welega Mr. Megarsa Kumara Hydrologist

Kelem Welega Mr. Oda Teshome Economist
Northe Shewa Mr. Henok Girma Irrigation Engineer
South West Shewa Mr. Bedasa Tadele Irrigation Engineer
South West Shewa Mr. Gemechu Getachew Irrigation Engineer
West Arsi Mr. Abebe Gela Irrigation Engineer
West Arsi Mr. Demissie Gnorie Irrigation Engineer
West Arsi Mr. Feyisa Guye Irrigation Engineer
West Arsi Mr. Hashim Hussen Economist
West Arsi Mr. Jemal Jeldo Economist
West Arsi Mr. Mekonnen Merga Environmentalist
West Arsi Mr. Mohamedsafi Edris Irrigation Engineer
West Arsi Mr. Molla Lemesa Agronomist
West Arsi Mr. Tamene Kena Sociologist
West Arsi Mr. Tibaho Gobena Irrigation Engineer
West Harerge Mr. Alemayehu Daniel Agronomist
West Harerge Mr. Dereje Kefyalew Irrigation Engineer
West Harerge Mr. Ferid Hussen Irrigation Engineer
West Harerge Mr. Nuredin Adem Irrigation Engineer
West Harerge Mr. Seifu Gizaw Economist
West Shewa Mr. Jergna Dorsisa Irrigation Engineer
West Shewa Mr. Solomon Mengistu Agronomist
West Shewa Mr. Zerhun Abiyu Irrigation Engineer
West Welega Mr. Belaye kebede Irrigation Engineer
239

West Welega Mr. Busa Degefe Economist

West Welega Mr. Temesgen Runda Irrigation Engineer
Ministry of Agriculture Mr. Amerga Kearsie Irrigation Engineer
Ministry of Agriculture Mr. Zegeye Kassahun Agronomist
Amhara Agriculture
Mr. Assefa Zeleke Economist
Bureau
OWWDSE Mr. Damtew Adefris Irrigation Engineer
OWWDSE Mr. Demelash Mulu Irrigation Engineer
OWWDSE Mr. Teshoma Wondemu Irrigation Engineer
Latinsa SC. Mr. Aschalew Deme Irrigation Engineer
Latinsa SC. Mr. Daba Feyisa Agronomist
Metaferia Consulting
Mr. Getu Getoraw Irrigation Engineer
Engineers
Mr. Hassen Bahru Sociologist
Engineers
Ms. Nitsuh Seifu Irrigation Engineer
Engineers
Remarks: Office Name is shown when he/she works for CBID project.
240
List of Editors
Name of Guidelines and Manuals Name Field Affiliation
 Guideline for Irrigation Master Lecturer in Arba

Mr. Ermias Alemu Demissie Irrigation Engineer
Plan Study Preparation on Minch University
Surface Water Resources Lecturer in Arba
Mr. Zerihun Anbesa Hydrologist
Minch University
 Technical Guideline for Lecturer in Arba
Mr. Ermias Alemu Demissie Irrigation Engineer
Design of Headworks Minch University
 Technical Guideline for Hydraulic
Irrigation Canal and Related Lecturer in Arba
Mr. Bereket Bezabih Engineer
Structures Minch University
(Geo technical)
Construction
LANDTEC JAPAN,
 Construction Control Manual Mr. Eiji Takemori Supervision (Hirna
Inc.
SSIP)
Construction
Supervision Sanyu Consultants
 Construction Control Manual Dr. Hiroaki Okada
(Sokido/Saraweba Inc.
SSIP)
Construction
Independent
 Construction Control Manual Mr. Shinsuke Kubo Supervision
Consulting Engineer
(Shaya SSIP)
 Technical Guideline for Chief JIID (The Japanese
Design of Headworks Mr. Toru Ikeuchi Advisor/Irrigation Institute of Irrigation
 Construction Control Manual Technology and Drainage)
 Technical Guideline for Facility Ministry of
Design of Headworks Mr. Kenjiro Futagami Design/Constructi Agriculture, Forestry
 Construction Control Manual on Supervision and Fisheries
Chief Ministry of
 All Guidelines and Manuals Mr. Hiromu Uno Advisor/Irrigation Agriculture, Forestry
Technology and Fisheries
 Manual for Runoff Analysis
 Manual of GIS for ArcGIS
Ministry of
(Basic & Advanced Section) Water resources
Mr. Nobuhiko Suzuki Agriculture, Forestry
 Manual on Land Use planning
and Fisheries
Classification Analysis Using
Remote Sensing
 Guidance for Oromia
Irrigation Development
Project Implementation
 Study and Design Technical
Guideline for Irrigation
Projects
 Technical Guideline for
Design of Headworks
 Technical Guideline for Small
Scale Reservoir
Facility Design/ Ministry of
 Construction Control Manual
Mr. Naoto Takano Construction Agriculture, Forestry
 Guidance for Preparation of Supervision and Fisheries
Operation and Maintenance
Manual
 Irrigation Water Users
Association Formation and
Development Manual
 Strengthening Irrigation Water
Users Association (IWUA)
Guideline
 Small Scale Irrigation Water
Management Guideline
241
List of Coordinators

Name Field Affiliation
Mr. Ryosuke Ito Coordinator/Training Independent
Mr. Tadashi Kikuchi Coordinator/Training Regional Planning International Co.
242
Contact Person
Mr. Yohannes Geleta (Irrigation Engineer; Environmentalist)

(Tel: 0911-981665, E-mail: yohketi@gmail.com)
Mr. Tafesse Andargie (Economist)

(Tel: 0911-718671, E-mail:andargietafesse@yahoo.com)
Mr. Abdeta Nate'a (Agronomist)

(Tel: 0912-230407, E-mail: abdetanatea@yahoo.com)
Oromia Irrigation Development Authority (OIDA)

Tel: 011-1262245
C/O JICA Ethiopia Office

Mina Building, 6th & 7th Floor,
P.O.Box 5384, Addis Ababa, Ethiopia
Tel : (251)-11-5504755
Fax: (251)-11-5504465

Technical Guide - Headworks Design - JICA

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Guide - Headworks Design - JICA

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA)

Oromia Irrigation Development Authority (OIDA)

Technical Guideline for

The Project for Capacity Building in Irrigation Development (CBID)

Oromia Irrigation Development Authority (OIDA) is established on June,

To improve irrigation development activities in the Region, the previous

Finally, I would like to thank the Japanese Government, JICA Ethiopia

Feyisa Asefa Adugna

Adugna Jabessa Shuba

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................. 1

2. BASIC DESIGN INPUT DATA ............................................................ 9

3. DESIGN OF HEADWORKS ............................................................... 33

5. EXAMPLE OF DESIGN FOR HEADWORKS ....................................... 187

References ........................................................................................... 234

Headworks is a structure constructed across the river to effect local

scale irrigation. Irrigation engineers are expected to design

Some of the concepts in this guideline need specific data. Material

Technically, the guideline deals with all components of headworks

Fig.1.1 Layout of headworks

1.5 Components of Headworks

Fig.1.2 Components of headworks

Apron Hirna River

Fig.1.3 General Plan of headworks

Fig.1.4 (a) Standardized layout of headworks

Fig.1.4 (b) Standardized cross section view of headworks

Fig.1.4 (c) Standardized longitudinal cross section view of headworks

1.6 Basic Considerations of Headworks

In principle, headworks should have the necessary water intake

Fig. 1.5 Flowchart for designing headworks

2. BASIC DESIGN INPUT DATA

2.1 Data for River Conditions

2.1.1 River Flow Regime

2. Water level and discharge,

(1) Discharge Condition

< Supplementary explanation >

(2) Water Level and Discharge

1) Current meter method

① To increase the accuracy of measurement, both the water depth and

Fig. 2.1 Velocity measuring point in the current meter method

Photo 2.1 Measuring by current meter method

2) Float measurement method

Fig. 2.2 Layout of float measurement method

Table 2.3 Velocity coefficient for float method

Water depth (m) ～0.7 0.7～1.3 1.3～2.6 2.6～5.2 5.2～

submerged depth of float (m) type 0.50 1.00 2.00 4.00

velocity coefficient 0.85 0.88 0.91 0.94 0.96

< Supplementary explanation >

Where:, Q: Discharge (m3/s)

This method doesn’t help us to know the probability year of the

(3) Sediment Load (if data are available)

frequency of sand removal from the settling

< Supplementary explanation >

model results and literature can be consulted to make the information

2.1.2 Condition of Riverbed

Data has to be collected regarding river bed conditions on ①condition of

(1) Condition of thalweg

< Supplementary explanation >

then this modification is not desirable.

(2) Riverbed slope

Iavg = Havg / ∑L ……………………………….(F. 2.1 )

Fig. 2.5 Layout for Riverbed slope calculation

< Supplementary explanation >

(3) Riverbed Materials

The purpose of drilling is to identify ワイヤーロープ

the type of riverbed material and ボーリングマシン